[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025231120A1 - Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device - Google Patents

Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device

Info

Publication number
WO2025231120A1
WO2025231120A1 PCT/US2025/027076 US2025027076W WO2025231120A1 WO 2025231120 A1 WO2025231120 A1 WO 2025231120A1 US 2025027076 W US2025027076 W US 2025027076W WO 2025231120 A1 WO2025231120 A1 WO 2025231120A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
event
cell
wireless device
threshold
base station
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/US2025/027076
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Stanislav Filin
Kyungmin Park
Esmael Hejazi Dinan
Jian Xu
Taehun Kim
Sungduck Chun
Hyoungsuk Jeon
Hua Zhou
Muhammad Ali Kazmi
Gautham PRASAD
Huifa LIN
Ali Cagatay CIRIK
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ofinno LLC
Original Assignee
Ofinno LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ofinno LLC filed Critical Ofinno LLC
Publication of WO2025231120A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025231120A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • H04W36/0085Hand-off measurements
    • H04W36/0088Scheduling hand-off measurements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/04Arrangements for maintaining operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports

Definitions

  • FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure maybe implemented.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
  • FIG. 11 A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
  • FIG. 11 B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
  • FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
  • FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure.
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
  • FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 38 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed.
  • the disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
  • a base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology.
  • Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies).
  • this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area.
  • This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station.
  • the plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like.
  • There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
  • a and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B.
  • A is called a subset of B.
  • possible subsets of B ⁇ celH , cell2 ⁇ are: ⁇ celH ⁇ , ⁇ cell2 ⁇ , and ⁇ celH , cell2 ⁇ .
  • the phrase “based on” is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • phrases “in response to” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the phrase “depending on” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the phrase “employing/usi ng” (or equally “employi ng/using at least”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/usi ng” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that affect or implement the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
  • parameters may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M
  • parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K
  • parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J.
  • N comprises K
  • N comprises J.
  • one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters
  • modules may be implemented as modules.
  • a module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements.
  • the modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g., hardware with a biological element), or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent.
  • modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/si mulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Script, or LabVI E WMathScript.
  • modules may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that inco rporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware.
  • programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs).
  • Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.
  • FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device.
  • HDL hardware description languages
  • VHDL VHSIC hardware description language
  • Verilog Verilog
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure maybe implemented.
  • the mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
  • CN core network
  • RAN radio access network
  • wireless device 106 wireless device
  • the CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g, the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • DNs data networks
  • the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
  • the RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols.
  • the communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • TDD time-division duplexing
  • wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable.
  • a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle roadside unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof.
  • the term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
  • the RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown).
  • the term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, Wi-Fi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof.
  • a base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
  • a base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface.
  • one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors).
  • the size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell.
  • the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
  • one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors.
  • One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node.
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • a baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized.
  • a repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node.
  • a relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network.
  • small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations.
  • the small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called "hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage.
  • Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
  • 3GPP The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A.
  • 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS).
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 4G fourth generation
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • 5G 5G System
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN).
  • NG- RAN next-generation RAN
  • Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG.
  • NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 1B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator.
  • mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1 A.
  • 5G-CN 5G core network
  • NG-RAN 154 a 5G core network
  • UEs 156A and 156B collectively UEs 156
  • the 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality.
  • the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions.
  • the network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g, a cloud-based platform).
  • the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1B for ease of illustration.
  • the UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs.
  • the UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g, packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session.
  • the UEs 156 maybe configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
  • the AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g, control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection.
  • NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a UE
  • AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1 B for the sake of clarity.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • NRF Policy Control Function
  • NEF Network Exposure Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • AUSF Authentication Server Function
  • the NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface.
  • the NG-RAN 154 may include one or more g NBs, illustrated as g NB 160A and g NB 160B (collectively g NBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162).
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 maybe more generically referred to as base stations.
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface.
  • one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface.
  • the NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network.
  • IP internet protocol
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface.
  • g N B 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface.
  • the NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack.
  • the protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane.
  • the user plane may handle data of interest to a user.
  • the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface.
  • the NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface.
  • the NG-C interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
  • the gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface.
  • the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack.
  • the ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.
  • the 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g, initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
  • an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages.
  • a protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220.
  • the protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
  • FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220.
  • PHYs physical layers
  • PHYs 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OS I) model.
  • the next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MACs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDCPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
  • MACs media access control layers
  • RLCs radio link control layers
  • PDCPs packet data convergence protocol layers
  • SDAPs service data application protocol layers
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling.
  • the UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN.
  • the PDU session may have one or more QoS flows.
  • a UPF of a CN e.g, the UPF 158B
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers.
  • the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.
  • QFI QoS flow indicator
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-g NB handover.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
  • PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario.
  • Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • a split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions.
  • the RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels.
  • the multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
  • the MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the gNB 220 (at the MAC 222) fordownlink and uplink.
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g, one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding.
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223. [0081] The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212 and 222.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the g NB 220.
  • An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
  • the downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers.
  • the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404.
  • An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet.
  • the data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer.
  • SDU service data unit
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
  • the remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g, with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer.
  • the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223.
  • the RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222.
  • the MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block.
  • the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A.
  • the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU.
  • the NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • the MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
  • SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • F flag
  • R reserved bit
  • FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222.
  • a MAC such as MAC 223 or MAC 222.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU.
  • MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions.
  • MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling.
  • Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs.
  • a MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE.
  • logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types.
  • One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels.
  • Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack.
  • a logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane.
  • a logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE.
  • a logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries.
  • the set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • PCCH paging control channel
  • BCCH broadcast control channel
  • MIB master information block
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • CCCH common control channel
  • DCCH dedicated control channel
  • DTCH dedicated traffic channel
  • Transport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface.
  • the set of transport channels defined by NR includes, for example: [0095] -- a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
  • PCH paging channel
  • BCH broadcast channel
  • DL-SCH downlink shared channel
  • UL-SCH uplink shared channel
  • the PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY.
  • a physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels.
  • the PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels.
  • the set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • a physical downlink control channel for carrying downlink control information (DCI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands;
  • DCI downlink control information
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • U Cl uplink control information
  • a physical uplink control channel for carrying UCI , which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and
  • CQI channel quality indicators
  • PMI pre-coding matrix indicators
  • Rl rank indicators
  • SR scheduling requests
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the physical layer Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer.
  • the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
  • FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack.
  • the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224.
  • the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
  • RRCs radio resource controls
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g, the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the CN.
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported.
  • the NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces.
  • NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages.
  • RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers.
  • the MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB).
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer.
  • RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • the UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1 A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure.
  • a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g, RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g, RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g, RRCJNACTIVE).
  • RRC connected 602 e.g, RRC_CONNECTED
  • RRC idle 604 e.g, RRC_I DLE
  • RRC inactive 606 e.g, RRCJNACTIVE
  • the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station.
  • the base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure.
  • the base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE.
  • the RRC context referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station.
  • These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information.
  • bearer configuration information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • security information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • PHY e.g., MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information
  • the RAN e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154
  • the UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell
  • the UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610.
  • RRC idle 604 an RRC context may not be established for the UE.
  • the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station.
  • the UE While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power).
  • the UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN.
  • Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
  • RRC inactive 606 the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608.
  • An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism.
  • RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection.
  • the purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network.
  • the mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network.
  • the mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI).
  • RAI RAN area identifier
  • TAI tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier
  • Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level.
  • the CN e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152 may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE's location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
  • RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level.
  • the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area.
  • a RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs.
  • a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas.
  • a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE's RAN notification area.
  • a base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station.
  • An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
  • a gNB such as g NBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split into two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU).
  • a gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface.
  • the gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP.
  • a gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing
  • FAM frequency divisional multiplexing
  • M-QAM M-quadrature amplitude modulation
  • M-PSK M-phase shift keying
  • source symbols e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols
  • source symbols e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols
  • source symbols e.g, M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols
  • source symbols e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols
  • source symbols e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols
  • source symbols e
  • the IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol.
  • an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency.
  • the F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block.
  • This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PARR).
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • PARR peak to average power ratio
  • Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN).
  • the SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames.
  • one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration.
  • a subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
  • the duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot.
  • a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g, cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range).
  • a numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration.
  • subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz
  • cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 pis.
  • NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps.
  • a slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g . , 14 OFDM symbols).
  • a numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration).
  • a subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled.
  • scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission.
  • These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • the slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs).
  • An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR.
  • An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • Such a limitation may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier.
  • multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
  • NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g, up to 400 MHz fora subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g, due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE's receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
  • NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation.
  • BWP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier.
  • a UE may be configured (e.g, via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g, up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell).
  • one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell.
  • the serving cell When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
  • a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same.
  • a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP.
  • a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space.
  • CORESETs control resource sets
  • a search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information.
  • the search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs).
  • a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in an active downlink BWP.
  • PSCell primary secondary cell
  • a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions.
  • a UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g, PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP.
  • the UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
  • One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • a value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions.
  • the value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.
  • a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
  • a base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell.
  • the UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time.
  • the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation.
  • the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero).
  • the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
  • a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs.
  • a UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g, if the second BWP is the default BWP).
  • Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • a UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In the example illustrated in FIG.
  • the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz.
  • the BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP.
  • the UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example of FIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908.
  • the switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.
  • UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the aggregated carriers in CA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs).
  • CCs component carriers
  • the CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates the three CA configurations with two CCs.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap.
  • the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
  • up to 32 CCs may be aggregated.
  • the aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD).
  • a serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC.
  • one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell.
  • the ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
  • one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell).
  • the PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover.
  • the PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input.
  • UEs may have different PCells.
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC) .
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC).
  • the other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells).
  • SCells secondary cells
  • the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE.
  • an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC).
  • DL SCC downlink secondary CC
  • UL SCC uplink secondary CC
  • Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated.
  • a bitmap e.g., one bit per SCell
  • Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell).
  • Downlink control information such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling.
  • the DCI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling.
  • Uplink control information e.g, HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl
  • the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded.
  • Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
  • a PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively.
  • the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013.
  • the PUCCH group 1050 includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053.
  • One or more uplink CCs may be configured as a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023.
  • One or more other uplink CCs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063.
  • a cell comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index.
  • the physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used.
  • a physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier.
  • a cell index may be determined using RRC messages.
  • a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID
  • a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index.
  • the disclosure when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier.
  • the same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation.
  • the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
  • a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC.
  • a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell.
  • a transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell.
  • a transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
  • a base station may transmit (e.g, unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A).
  • RSs Reference Signals
  • the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B).
  • the PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station.
  • the PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH.
  • SS synchronization signal
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • FIG. 11 A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location.
  • a burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG.
  • 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor.
  • the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
  • the SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11 A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers).
  • the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency.
  • the PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 0FDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g, two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g, across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
  • the location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g, if the UE is searching for the cell).
  • the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB).
  • a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB.
  • the CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster.
  • a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC).
  • FEC forward error correction
  • the FEC may use polar coding.
  • One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH.
  • the PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station.
  • the PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters.
  • the Ml B may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell.
  • MIB master information block
  • the RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ).
  • SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell.
  • the UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCCH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH.
  • the PDSCH may include the SIB1.
  • the SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB.
  • the PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency.
  • the UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
  • the UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters).
  • QCL quasi co-located
  • SS/PBCH blocks may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell).
  • a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam
  • a second SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
  • a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
  • the CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI).
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose.
  • the base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may provide the CSI report to the base station.
  • the base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g, the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets.
  • a CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity.
  • the base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource.
  • the base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
  • the base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently.
  • periodic CSI reporting the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports.
  • the base station may request a CSI report.
  • the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.
  • the CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports.
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET.
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols fordownlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
  • Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation.
  • the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH).
  • An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation.
  • At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern.
  • a front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g, one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • a base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g, a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH.
  • a DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE .
  • a radio network may support (e.g, at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different.
  • the base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix.
  • the UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
  • a transmitter may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth.
  • the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth.
  • the first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs.
  • the set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
  • PRG precoding resource block group
  • a PDSCH may comprise one or more layers.
  • the UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g, modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS.
  • An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation.
  • the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel.
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern.
  • the front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g, one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g, maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS.
  • An NR network may support (e.g, for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
  • CP-OFDM cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • a PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSsforthe PUSCH.
  • Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE.
  • the presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS.
  • a radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation.
  • SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies.
  • a scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources.
  • An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter.
  • an SRS resource in an SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously).
  • the UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets.
  • An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions.
  • the UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats.
  • At least one DCI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets.
  • An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling.
  • An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DCI formats.
  • the UE when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g, an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
  • SRS resource configuration identifier e.g, an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity e.g, an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port.
  • the channel e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like
  • a first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed.
  • the one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
  • Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication.
  • a beam may be associated with one or more reference signals.
  • a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals.
  • the UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.
  • FIG. 11 B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
  • CSI-RSs channel state information reference signals
  • a square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell.
  • a base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs.
  • One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g, RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g, symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g, subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g, QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.
  • a CSI-RS resource configuration identity
  • the three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured.
  • Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol.
  • Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol.
  • Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol.
  • a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE.
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • TDM time domain multiplexing
  • CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements.
  • the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration.
  • the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI).
  • the UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states.
  • the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam.
  • the UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station.
  • the base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a UE may assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl).
  • FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1 , P2, and P3.
  • Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1 ).
  • Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement.
  • the UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3.
  • Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g, to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1).
  • Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam.
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement.
  • the UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
  • a UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure.
  • the UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on the initiation of the BFR procedure.
  • the UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g, having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
  • the UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs).
  • RSs reference signals
  • a quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources.
  • BLER block error rate
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • RSRQ reference signal received quality
  • the base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g, a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like).
  • the RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g, Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
  • the channel characteristics e.g, Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like
  • a network e.g, a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network
  • the UE may initiate a random access procedure.
  • a UE in an RRCJDLE state and/or an RRCJNACTIVE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g, for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g, when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized).
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g, other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like).
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request.
  • a network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
  • FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure.
  • a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble).
  • the Msg 21312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
  • RAR random access response
  • the configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages.
  • the one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE.
  • RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGenerai); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated).
  • the base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs.
  • the one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRC_I NACTIVE state).
  • the UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313.
  • the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 21312 and the Msg 41314.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-Config Index).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more reference signals maybe SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 31313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g, a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 31313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g. , an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g, a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
  • at least one reference signal e.g. , an SSB and/or CSI-RS
  • an uplink carrier e.g, a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g, a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions).
  • An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g, group A and/or group B).
  • a preamble group may comprise one or more preambles.
  • the UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 31313.
  • the UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g, rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS).
  • the UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 31313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g, group A and group B).
  • a base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs).
  • the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions.
  • the UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion.
  • One or more RACH parameters e.g, ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionLisf
  • the UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission.
  • the UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission.
  • the UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network.
  • the UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power.
  • the UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission.
  • the ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission.
  • the UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g, SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission.
  • the UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g, PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER).
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g, preambleTransMax).
  • the Msg 21312 received by the UE may include an RAR.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the Msg 2 1312 maybe scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • RA-RNTI random access RNTI
  • the Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 31313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI).
  • TC-RNTI Temporary Cell RNTI
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g, ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312.
  • the UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology.
  • the PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure.
  • the UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions.
  • An example of RA-RNTI may be as follows:
  • RA-RNTI 1 + sjd + 14 x tjd + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id, where sjd may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ⁇ sjd ⁇ 14), tjd may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 ⁇ tjd ⁇ 80), fjd may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 ⁇ fjd ⁇ 8), and ul_carrierjd may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
  • sjd may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ⁇ sjd ⁇ 14)
  • the UE may transmit the Msg 31313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312).
  • the Msg 31313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves.
  • Contention resolution (e.g, using the Msg 31313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE.
  • the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 31313 (e.g, a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
  • the Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 31313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 31313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g, if the UE is in an RRC_I DLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed.
  • the UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier.
  • An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier.
  • a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier.
  • the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL).
  • the UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold.
  • Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier.
  • the UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 31313) in one or more cases.
  • the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
  • FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1320 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322.
  • the Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 2 1322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively.
  • the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 31313 and/or the Msg 41314.
  • the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover.
  • a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321.
  • the UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR.
  • a time window e.g., ra-ResponseWindow
  • the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceld).
  • the UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space.
  • C-RNTI Cell RNTI
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier.
  • the UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
  • FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
  • Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE.
  • Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g, an SR, a HARQ AC K/NACK, and/or the like).
  • the UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 21312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • Msg 21312 e.g., an RAR
  • the UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum.
  • the UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure.
  • the one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g, LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g, licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
  • the UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331.
  • the RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342.
  • MCS modulation and coding schemes
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 e.g, a PRACH
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 e.g, a PUSCH
  • the RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g, delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g, an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)).
  • the base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g, a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g, a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI).
  • the UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g, the transport block 1342).
  • a UE and a base station may exchange control signaling.
  • the control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g, layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g, layer 2).
  • the control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
  • the downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling.
  • the UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DCI).
  • the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
  • a base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits.
  • the identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
  • RNTI radio network temporary identifier
  • DCIs may be used for different purposes.
  • a purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification.
  • the P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information.
  • SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI may indicate a random access response (RAR).
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG. 13A).
  • RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.
  • CS-RNTI Configured Scheduling RNTI
  • TPC-PUCCH-RNTI Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI
  • TPC-SRS-RNTI Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI
  • INT-RNTI Interruption RNTI
  • the base station may transmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats.
  • DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell.
  • DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads).
  • DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0).
  • DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell.
  • DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads).
  • DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g. , with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0).
  • DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs.
  • DCI format 2 J may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE.
  • DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs.
  • DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases.
  • DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
  • the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation.
  • channel coding e.g., polar coding
  • a base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH.
  • the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs).
  • the number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) maybe 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number.
  • a CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs).
  • REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol.
  • the mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • the base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs).
  • a CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces.
  • the base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain.
  • a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot.
  • the first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain.
  • a third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot.
  • a fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • the CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels).
  • the base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs.
  • a CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration.
  • a CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter.
  • the antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET.
  • a search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregation level.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set.
  • a set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE.
  • a set of CCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g, C-RNTI).
  • the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages.
  • the UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET.
  • the UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.
  • the decoding may be referred to as blind decoding.
  • the UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g, scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value).
  • the UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g, a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
  • the UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g, uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station.
  • the uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the UE may transmit the HARQ acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel.
  • the UE may transmit the CSI to the base station.
  • the base station based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g, comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR).
  • SR scheduling requests
  • the UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station.
  • the UE may transmit a UCI (e.g, HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • HARQ-ACK HARQ acknowledgements
  • CSI report CSI report
  • SR SR
  • the UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.
  • PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may transmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-AC K/SR bits) is one or two.
  • PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of H ARQ-AC K/S R bits is one or two.
  • PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more.
  • PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code.
  • PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
  • the base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message.
  • the plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g. , up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell.
  • a PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid, and/or a number (e.g., a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • a PUCCH resource identifier e.g., pucch-Resourceid
  • a number e.g., a maximum number
  • the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g, HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to "0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”.
  • a total bit length of the UCI information bits e.g, HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI.
  • the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g, 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3''.
  • a third value e.g, 1406
  • the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission.
  • the UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g, with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH.
  • a three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
  • the base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506.
  • the communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504.
  • the data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network.
  • data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission.
  • Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
  • the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504.
  • the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (Ml MO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
  • a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502.
  • a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504.
  • the reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, Ml MO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
  • a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas.
  • the multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g. , single-user Ml MO or multi-user Ml MO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming.
  • the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may be associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively.
  • Memory 1514 and memory 1524 may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application.
  • the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g, one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors.
  • the one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, i npu t/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively.
  • the one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like).
  • sensors e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526.
  • the processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502.
  • the power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively.
  • FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • FIG. 16A When transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
  • FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g, RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g., primary cell, secondary cell).
  • the wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g., two or more base stations in dual connectivity) via the plurality of cells.
  • the one or more messages (e.g, as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, and RRC layers for configuring the wireless device.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.
  • a timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires.
  • a timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running.
  • a timer may be associated with a value (e.g, the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value).
  • the duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g, due to BWP switching).
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process.
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure.
  • a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response.
  • the time difference between two time stamps may be used.
  • a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted.
  • Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a handover in a radio access network.
  • the BS1 and the UE may perform measurement control and reports 1701.
  • the BS1 may send to the UE, one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for the UE measurements procedures.
  • the UE may send to the BS1, one or more messages comprising measurement results determined based on the configuration parameters.
  • the BS1 may determine a handover decision 1702 for the UE based on the measurement results received from the UE (e.g, MeasurementReport) and/or radio resource management (RRM) information.
  • RRM radio resource management
  • the BS1 may send to the BS2, a handover request 1703 requesting the BS2 to prepare resources for the handover of the UE from a cell of the BS1 (e.g, source cell) to a cell of the BS2 (e.g, target cell).
  • the handover request 1703 may comprise information required for the BS2 to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1703 may comprise a list of E-UTRA radio access bearers (E-RABs) requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E- RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1703 may comprise a list of protocol data unit (PDU) sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be setup list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS2 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the BS2 may perform admission control 1704 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1703. [0236] The BS2 may prepare resources for the UE. The BS2 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge 1705. The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the cell of the BS2.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs admitted list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the UE, BS1, and BS2 perform RAN handover completion 1706.
  • the BS2 and the AMF perform path switch 1707.
  • the path switch 1707 may comprise switching user data from the BS1 to the BS2.
  • the BS2 sends to the BS1, a UE context release 1708. After the BS1 receives the UE context release 1708, the BS1 is no longer required to keep the UE context.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a conditional handover in a radio access network.
  • the BS1 and the UE may perform measurement control and reports 1801.
  • the BS1 may send to the UE, one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for the UE measurements procedures.
  • the UE may send to the BS1, one or more messages comprising measurement results determined based on the configuration parameters.
  • the BS1 may determine a conditional handover decision 1802 for the UE based on the measurement results received from the UE (e.g., MeasurementReport) and/or radio resource management (RRM) information.
  • the conditional handover decision may comprise determining one or more candidate cells of the one or more candidate BSs.
  • the one or more candidate cells of the one or more candidate BSs may comprise a first cell of the BS2 and a second cell of the BS3.
  • the BS1 may send to the BS2, a handover request 1803.
  • the handover request 1803 may comprise information required for the BS2 to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1803 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1803 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be setup list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS2 may use the list of PD U sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the BS1 may send to the BS3, a handover request 1804.
  • the handover request 1804 may comprise information required for the BS3 to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1804 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS3 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the handover request 1804 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources to be setup list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the BS3 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
  • the BS2 may perform admission control 1805 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1803.
  • the BS3 may perform admission control 1806 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1804.
  • the BS2 may prepare resources for the UE.
  • the BS2 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge
  • the handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the first cell of the BS2.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the BS3 may prepare resources for the UE.
  • the BS3 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge
  • the handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the second cell of the BS3.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs admitted list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of admitted PD U sessions for the UE (e.g. , PDU session resources admitted list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the BS1 may sends to the UE, an RRCReconfiguration 1809.
  • the RRCReconfiguration 1809 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the first cell of the BS2 or to the second cell of the BS3.
  • the RRCReconfiguration 1809 may comprise conditional handover execution conditions for the first cell of the BS2 and to the second cell of the BS3.
  • the UE may send to the BS1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete 1810.
  • the UE may evaluate the conditional handover execution conditions for the first cell of the BS2 and to the second cell of the BS3. If the first cell of the BS2 satisfies the conditional handover execution conditions, the UE makes handover decision 1811 to the first cell of the BS2.
  • the UE, BS1, and BS2 perform RAN handover completion 1812.
  • the BS2 sends to the BS1, a handover success 1813 to inform the BS1 that the UE has successfully accessed the first cell of the BS2.
  • the BS1 sends to the BS3, a handover cancel 1814. After receiving the handover cancel 1814, the BS3 may release the resources reserved for the UE.
  • the BS2 and the AMF may perform path switch 1815.
  • the path switch 1815 may comprise switching user data from the BS1 to the BS2.
  • the BS2 may send to the BS1, a UE context release 1816. After the BS1 receives the UE context release 1816, the BS1 may be no longer required to keep the UE context.
  • Multi-radio dual connectivity is a dual connectivity (DC), where a UE capable of receiving signals from multiple BSs and/or transmitting signals to multiple BSs may be configured to use resources provided by two different BSs, one providing NR access and the other one providing either E-UTRA or NR access.
  • One node may act as the master node (MN) and the other as the secondary node (SN).
  • MN and SN may be connected via a network interface.
  • the MN may be connected to the core network.
  • the core network may be EPC or 5GC.
  • MR-DC may be supported via E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity (EN-DC), in which a UE is connected to one eNB that acts as an MN and one gNB that acts as an SN.
  • g N B may also be called en-gNB.
  • MR-DC may be supported via NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity (NGEN-DC), in which a UE is connected to one eNB that acts as an MN and one gNB that acts as an SN. In this case eNB may be call ng-eNB.
  • MR-DC may be supported via NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity (NE-DC), in which a UE is connected to one gNB that acts as an MN and one eNB that acts as an SN. In this case eNB may be call ng-eNB.
  • NR-DC NR-NR dual connectivity
  • a UE is connected to one g N B that acts as an MN and another g N B that acts as an SN.
  • a cell of an MN to which a UE performs initial access in the MN is called primary cell (PCell). If, in addition to PCell, the UE uses one or more cells of the MN for carrier aggregation, these cells are called secondary cells (SCell).
  • the PCell and SCell(s) of the MN form a master cell group (MCG).
  • a cell of an SN to which a UE performs initial access in the SN is called primary secondary cell (PSCell). If, in addition to PSCell, the UE uses one or more cells of the SN for carrier aggregation, these cells are called secondary cells (SCell).
  • SCell secondary cells
  • the PSCell and SCell(s) of the SN form a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • PCell and/or PSCell may also be called special cells (SpCell).
  • FIG. 19 illustrates an example of a secondary node addition procedure for EN-DC.
  • a secondary node addition procedure may be initiated by the MN and may be used to establish a UE context at the SN to provide resources from the SN to the UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN, SgNB addition request message 1901 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN cells.
  • the SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be added list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE.
  • the SN may also select one or more SCells for the UE.
  • the SN may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 1903.
  • RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 1903 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 1904 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
  • the MN may send to the SN, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 1905, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the SN may trigger random access procedure 1906 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates an example of a secondary node addition procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
  • a secondary node addition procedure may be initiated by the MN and may be used to establish a UE context at the SN to provide resources from the SN to the UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN, SN addition request message 2001 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SN addition request message 2001 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SN addition request message 2001 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN cells.
  • the SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SN addition request message 2001 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE.
  • the SN may also select one or more SCells for the UE.
  • the SN may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2002.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2002 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2002 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2502 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2003.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message 2003 may comprise the RRC configuration.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2004 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
  • the MN may send to the SN, SN reconfiguration complete message 2005, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the SN may trigger random access procedure 2006 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates an example of a conditional secondary node addition procedure for EN-DC.
  • a conditional secondary node addition procedure may be used when there are more than one candidate secondary nodes for a UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN1, SgNB addition request message 2101 requesting the SN1 to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN1 cells.
  • the SN1 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g. , E-RABs to be added list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN1 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN2, SgNB addition request message 2102 requesting the SN2 to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN2 cells.
  • the SN2 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g., E-RABs to be added list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the SN1 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN1 for the UE.
  • the SN1 may also select one or more SCells of the SN1 for the UE.
  • the SN2 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN2 for the UE.
  • the SN2 may also select one or more SCells of the SN2 for the UE.
  • the SN1 may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN1 in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the SN2 may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN2 in an NR RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2105.
  • the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message 2105 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message from the SN1 and the NR RRC configuration message from the SN2.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 2106 confirming that the UE is able to perform the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN2.
  • the UE may perform evaluation of execution conditions (e.g., conditions for SN addition) according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN2. For example, the execution conditions for at least one PSCell of the SN1 are met.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 2107 indicating that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
  • the MN may send to the SN1, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 2108, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the MN may send to the SN2, SgNB release request message 2109, to cancel the conditional secondary node addition with the SN2.
  • the SN2 may send to the MN, SgNB release request message 2110 to confirm the cancellation.
  • the SN may trigger random access procedure 2111 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a conditional secondary node addition procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
  • a conditional secondary node addition procedure may be used when there are more than one candidate secondary nodes for a UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN1, SN addition request message 2201 requesting the SN1 to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SN addition request message 2201 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SN addition request message 2201 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN1 cells.
  • the SN1 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SN addition request message 2201 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN1 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the MN may send to the SN2, SN addition request message 2202 requesting the SN2 to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SN addition request message 2202 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2202 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN2 cells.
  • the SN2 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SN addition request message 2202 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources to be added list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN2 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the SN1 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN1 for the UE.
  • the SN1 may also select one or more SCells of the SN1 for the UE.
  • the SN2 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN2 for the UE.
  • the SN2 may also select one or more SCells of the SN2 for the UE.
  • the SN1 may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2203.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2203 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN1 in an RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2203 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2703 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the SN2 may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2204.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN2 in an RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the LIE (e.g, PD U session resources not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2205.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message 2205 may comprise the RRC configuration message from the SN1 and the RRC configuration message from the SN2.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2206 confirming that the UE is able to perform the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received RRC configuration from the SN2.
  • the UE may perform evaluation of execution conditions (e.g., conditions for SN addition) according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received RRC configuration from the SN2. For example, the execution conditions for at least one PSCell of the SN1 are met.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2207 indicating that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
  • the MN may send to the SN1, SN reconfiguration complete message 2208, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the MN may send to the SN2, SN release request message 2209, to cancel the conditional secondary node addition with the SN2.
  • the SN2 may send to the MN, SN release request message 2210 to confirm the cancellation.
  • the SN may trigger random access procedure 2211 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a secondary node initiated secondary node change procedure for EN-DC.
  • a secondary node change procedure may be initiated either by MN or SN and may be used to transfer a UE context from a source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from one SN to another.
  • the source SN may send to the MN, SgNB change required message 2301.
  • the SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise target SN (T-SN) identifier.
  • the SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information.
  • the SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells.
  • the T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the MN may send to the T-SN, SgNB addition request message 2302 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information.
  • the SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells.
  • the T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g., E-RABs to be added list).
  • the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the T-SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE.
  • the T-SN may also select one or more S Cells for the UE.
  • the T-SN may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2304.
  • RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2304 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRCConnection ReconfigurationComplete message 2305 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
  • the MN may send to the S-SN, SgNB change confirm message 2306, informing the S-SN that the resources allocated for the UE may be released.
  • the MN may send to the T-SN, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 2307, informing the T-SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the T-SN may trigger random access procedure 2308 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated T-SN resources.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a secondary node initiated secondary node change procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
  • a secondary node change procedure is initiated either by MN or SN and used to transfer a UE context from a source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from one SN to another.
  • the source SN may send to the MN, SN change required message 2401.
  • the SN change required message 2401 may comprise target SN (T-SN) identifier.
  • the SN change required message 2401 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information.
  • the SN change required message 2401 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells.
  • the T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the MN may send to the T-SN, SN addition request message 2402 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE.
  • the SN addition request message 2402 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information.
  • the SN addition request message 2402 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells.
  • the T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
  • the SN addition request message 2402 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list).
  • the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
  • the T-SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE.
  • the T-SN may also select one or more S Cells for the UE.
  • the T-SN may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2403.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2403 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a RRC configuration parameter.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2403 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list).
  • the list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc.
  • the SN addition request acknowledge message 2903 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
  • the MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2404.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message 2404 may comprise the RRC configuration message.
  • the UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
  • the UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2405 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
  • the MN may send to the S-SN, SN change confirm message 2406, informing the S-SN that the resources allocated for the UE may be released.
  • the MN may send to the T-SN, SN reconfiguration complete message 2407, informing the T-SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
  • the T-SN may trigger random access procedure 2408 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated T-SN resources.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates an example of an intra-g N B-DU LTM.
  • a UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2501 to a gNB-CU.
  • the L3 measurement reports 2501 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU, a UE context modification request message 2502.
  • the UE context modification request message 2502 may comprise a request for the gNB-DU to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the gNB-DU.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2403.
  • the UE context modification response message 2503 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • RACH random access channel
  • the gNB-CU may send to the gNB-DU, a DL RRC message transfer message 2504.
  • the DL RRC message transfer message 2504 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2505.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2506.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2507.
  • the UL RRC message transfer message 2507 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2506.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU, L1 measurement reports 2508.
  • the gNB-DU may determine to start LTM execution for the UE.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2509 (e.g, a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command).
  • the cell switch command 2509 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested.
  • the RRCReconfiguration message 2505 may comprise LTM configurations with identifiers 1, 2, and 3.
  • the cell switch command 2509 may comprise LTM configuration identifier 2 requesting the UE to perform cell switch according to the parameters in the LTM configuration with identifier 2 from the LTM configurations in the RRCReconfiguration message 2405.
  • the UE may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch).
  • LTM execution e.g., execute the cell switch.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2510.
  • the access success message 2510 may comprise a target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an example of an inter-g N B-DU LTM.
  • a UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2601 to a gNB-CU.
  • the L3 measurement reports 2601 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may send to a g N B-DU2, a UE context setup request message 2602.
  • the UE context setup request message 2602 may comprise a request for the g N B- DU2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g NB-DU2.
  • the g NB-DU2 may be a candidate target gNB-DU for LTM of the UE.
  • the g NB-D U2 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context setup response message 2603.
  • the UE context setup response message 2603 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • RACH random access channel
  • the gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU1, a UE context setup modification message 2604.
  • the UE context modification request message 2604 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells of the g NB-DU2 for the UE.
  • the g N B-DU 1 may be a source g NB-DU for LTM of the UE.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2605.
  • the UE context modification response message 2605 may comprise RS configuration of the source cell of the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may send to the gN B-DU2, a UE context setup modification message 2606.
  • the UE context modification request message 2606 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gN B- D Us for the UE.
  • the g NB-D U2 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2607.
  • the gNB-CU may send to the g N B- DU 1 , a DL RRC message transfer message 2608.
  • the DL RRC message transfer message 2608 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2609.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2610.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2611.
  • the UL RRC message transfer message 2611 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2610.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU1 , L1 measurement reports 2612.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may determine to start LTM execution for the UE.
  • the gNB-DU1 may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2613 (e.g., a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command).
  • the cell switch command 2613 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, an LTM cell change notification message 2614.
  • the LTM cell change notification message 2614 may comprise a target cell identifier in the target gN B-DU2 (the identifier of the cell to which the cell switch of the UE is requested) and/or selected beam information (information of the beam selected for the cell switch in the target cell).
  • the gNB-CU may send to the gN B-DU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2615.
  • the LTM cell change notification message 2615 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information.
  • the UE may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch).
  • LTM execution e.g., execute the cell switch.
  • the gNB-DU2 may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2616.
  • the access success message 2616 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example of an inter-g N B-CU LTM.
  • a UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2701 to a gNB-CU 1.
  • the L3 measurement reports 2701 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
  • the g NB-CU 1 may be a source gNB-CU for LTM of the UE.
  • the gNB-CU 1 may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the g NB-C U 1 may send to a g NB-CU2, a handover request message 2702.
  • the handover request message 2702 may comprise a request for the g N B-C U2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g N B-CU2.
  • the g N B-C U2 may be a candidate target gNB-CU for LTM of the UE.
  • the g NB-C U2 may send to a g NB-DU2, a UE context setup request message 2703.
  • the UE context setup request message 2703 may comprise a request for the g N B- DU2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g NB-DU2.
  • the g NB-DU2 may be a candidate target gNB-DU for LTM of the UE.
  • the g N B- D U2 may send to the g N B-C U2, a UE context setup response message 2704.
  • the UE context setup response message 2704 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • RACH random access channel
  • the gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover request acknowledge message 2705.
  • the handover request acknowledge message 2705 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-CU1 may send to a gNB-DU 1 , a UE context setup modification message 2706.
  • the UE context modification request message 2706 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells of the g NB-DU2 for the UE.
  • the g NB-DU 1 may be a source gNB-DU for LTM of the UE.
  • the gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a UE context modification response message 2707.
  • the UE context modification response message 2707 may comprise RS configuration of the source cell of the UE.
  • the g NB-C U 1 may send to the g NB-CU2, a handover request message 2708.
  • the handover request message 2708 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gNB-CUs and/or gNB-DUs for the UE.
  • the g N B-C U2 may send to the g N B- D U2, a UE context setup modification message 2709.
  • the UE context modification request message 2709 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gNB-CUs and/or gNB-DUs for the UE.
  • the g NB-D U2 may send to the g NB-CU2, a UE context modification response message 2710.
  • the gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover request acknowledgement message 2711.
  • the gNB-CU1 may send to the gNB-DU 1 , a DL RRC message transfer message 2712.
  • the DL RRC message transfer message 2712 may comprise an RRCReconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-DU1 may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2713.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2714.
  • the gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , an UL RRC message transfer message 2715.
  • the UL RRC message transfer message 2715 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2714.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU1 , L1 measurement reports 2716.
  • the g NB-D U 1 may determine to start LTM execution for the UE.
  • the g N B- D U 1 may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2717 (e.g. , a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command).
  • the cell switch command 2717 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested.
  • the gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , an LTM cell change notification message 2718.
  • the LTM cell change notification message 2718 may comprise a target cell identifier in the target gNB-DU2 (the identifier of the cell to which the cell switch of the UE is requested) and/or selected beam information (information of the beam selected for the cell switch in the target cell).
  • the gNB-CU1 may send to the gNB-CU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2719.
  • the LTM cell change notification message 2719 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information.
  • the g NB-C U2 may send to the g NB-DU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2720.
  • the LTM cell change notification message 2720 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information.
  • the UE based on the cell switch command 2717, may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch).
  • the g N B- D U2 may send to the g N B-C U2, an access success message 2721.
  • the access success message 2721 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
  • the gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover success message 2722.
  • the handover success message 2722 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
  • FIG. 28 illustrates an example of a UE-based intra-gN B-DU LTM (e.g., conditional LTM).
  • a UE-based intra-gN B-DU LTM e.g., conditional LTM
  • a UE may perform a UE-based LTM in case of intra-gN B-DU LTM and/or in case of inter-gN B-DU LTM and/or in case of Inter-gNB-CU LTM.
  • a UE may send L3 measurement reports 2801 to a gNB-CU.
  • the L3 measurement reports 2801 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU, a UE context modification request message 2802.
  • the UE context modification request message 2802 may comprise a request for the gNB-DU to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the gNB-DU.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2803.
  • the UE context modification response message 2803 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • RACH random access channel
  • the gNB-CU may send to the gNB-DU, a DL RRC message transfer message 2804.
  • the DL RRC message transfer message 2804 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message comprising one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2805.
  • the UE may send to the gNB-DU, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2806.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2807.
  • the UL RRC message transfer message 2807 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2806.
  • the UE may perform L1 measurements corresponding to the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE (e.g, signal level measurements for the serving cell and/or for the one or more candidate LTM cells).
  • the UE may determine to perform LTM execution to a cell of the one or more candidate LTM cells.
  • the gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2808.
  • the access success message 2808 may comprise a target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
  • the gNB-CU may send to the UE (via gNB-DU), the RRCReconfiguration message comprising the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
  • the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE may correspond to one or more future LTM executions by the UE.
  • a BS may determine to start a handover procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE.
  • a BS may determine to start a conditional handover procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE.
  • An MN may determine to start an SN addition procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE.
  • An MN may determine to start a conditional SN addition procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE.
  • An SN may determine to start an SN change procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE.
  • a BS may configure a UE to perform and report measurements.
  • the BS may configure the UE to perform and report periodic measurements.
  • the BS may configure the UE to perform and report event triggered measurements.
  • the BS may configure one or more events for the UE to perform and report measurements.
  • the UE may report to the BS, that the event happened.
  • the UE may report to the BS, one or more measurements configured by the BS for the event. For example, if the event is associated with one cell, the UE may report signal measurements for the cell. For example, if the event is associated with two cells, the UE may report signal measurements for the two cells.
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A1.
  • the event A1 may comprise an event when a signal metric of a serving cell of the UE minus a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1 (e.g, Ms - Hys > Thresh).
  • the signal metric of a cell may comprise a reference signal received power (RS RP) of a reference signal of the cell.
  • the signal metric of the cell may comprise a reference signal received quality (RS RQ) of the reference signal of the cell.
  • the signal metric of the cell may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SIN R) of the reference signal of the cell.
  • the reference signal of the cell may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal.
  • the reference signal of the cell may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A2.
  • the event A2 may comprise an event when a signal metric of a serving cell plus a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2 (e.g, Ms + Hys ⁇ Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A3.
  • the event A3 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell plus a cell specific offset of the second cell minus a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell cell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell cell plus an offset of the event A3 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A4.
  • the event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A5.
  • the event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell cell plus a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5 (e.g, Mp + Hys ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus by a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2).
  • a second threshold of the event A5 e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2.
  • the event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of an SCell cell plus a cell specific offset of the SCell cell plus an offset of the event A6 (e.g, Mn + Ocn - Hys > Ms + Ocs + Off).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event B1.
  • the event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of an inter- RAT neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the I nter-RAT neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the inter- RAT neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event B2.
  • the event B2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a PCell plus a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2 (e.g., Mp + Hys ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an inter-RAT neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell plus a cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell minus the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2).
  • a second threshold of the event B2 e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2.
  • the one or more events may comprise an event 11.
  • the event 11 may comprise an event when a measurement of an interference minus a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11 (e.g. Mi - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event C1.
  • the event C1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio minus a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1 (e.g, Ms - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event C2.
  • the event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio plus a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2 (e.g, Ms + Hys ⁇ Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event D1.
  • the event D1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a first reference location of the event D1 minus a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1 (e.g, M/1 - Hys > Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a second reference location of the event D1 plus the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1 (e.g, M/2 + Hys ⁇ Thresh2).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event D2.
  • the event D2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a first moving reference location of the event D2 minus a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2 (e.g, M/1 - Hys > Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a second moving reference location of the event D2 plus the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2 (e.g . , M/2 + Hys ⁇ Thresh?).
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event T1.
  • the conditional event T 1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a time at the UE is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the UE is less than the threshold of the conditional event T1 plus a duration of the conditional event T1 (e.g., Thresh ⁇ Mt ⁇ Thresh + Duration).
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event A3.
  • the conditional event A3 may comprise an event A3 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event A4.
  • the conditional event A4 may comprise an event A4 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event A5.
  • the conditional event A5 may comprise an event A5 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event D1.
  • the conditional event D1 may comprise an event D1 fora conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
  • the one or more events may comprise a conditional event D2.
  • the conditional event D2 may comprise an event D2 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
  • the one or more events may comprise an event X1.
  • the event X1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay UE for the UE plus a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1 (e.g., Mr+ Hys ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell plus a cell specific offset of the NR cell minus the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh?).
  • a second threshold of the event X1 e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh?
  • the one or more events may comprise an event X2.
  • the event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay UE for the UE plus a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2 (e.g., Mr+ Hys ⁇ Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event Y1.
  • the event Y 1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell plus a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1 (Mp + Hys ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1 (Mr- Hys > Thresh?).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event Y2.
  • the event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2 (Mr- Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event Z1.
  • the event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device plus a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1 (Mr + Hys ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1 (Mn - Hys > Thresh2).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event H 1.
  • the event H 1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1 (Ms - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event H2.
  • the event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2 (Ms + Hys ⁇ Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A3H1.
  • the event A3H1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell plus an offset of the event A3H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1 (Ms - Hys > Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A3H2.
  • the event A3H2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell plus an offset of the event A3H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device plus a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2 (Ms + Hys ⁇ Thresh).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A4H1.
  • the event A4H1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1 Ms - Hys2 > Thresh2).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A4H2.
  • the event A4H2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device plus a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2 (Ms + Hys2 ⁇ Thresh2).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A5H1.
  • the event A5H1 may comprise an event when all of a first condition and a second condition and a third condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1 (Mp + Hys1 ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Thresh2).
  • the third condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H1 (Ms- Hys2> Thresh3).
  • the one or more events may comprise an event A5H2.
  • the event A5H2 may comprise an event when all of a first condition and a second condition and a third condition are satisfied.
  • the first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2 (Mp + Hys1 ⁇ Threshl).
  • the second condition is satisfied when a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Thresh2).
  • the third condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2 (Ms + Hys2 ⁇ Thresh3).
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a radio link failure.
  • a signal level of a serving cell may experience a degradation with time. For example, a signal metric (e.g, reference signal received power) may become below a threshold (e.g., a threshold below which it is not possible to receive the reference signal of the serving cell and/or a threshold below which it is not possible to have a reliable communication with the serving cell).
  • a wireless device may start a timer T310. If the timer T310 expires, but the radio link conditions of the serving cell do not improve, a radio link failure (RLF) event happens (e.g, the wireless device declares the RLF event).
  • the RLF event may require the wireless device to stop communication with the serving cell and start a connection reestablishment procedure (e.g, find a new cell and try to connect to the new cell).
  • a handover failure may happen.
  • a first cell e.g, a serving cell
  • a second cell e.g, a target cell
  • an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device.
  • This may refer to, for example, too late handover.
  • This may refer to, for example, HOF.
  • an RLF may happen in the second cell during the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell or shortly after the handover. This may refer to, for example, HOF.
  • a wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting the measurement events (e.g, A1 event, A2 event, A3 event, etc.). This may allow the wireless device, for example, to reduce measurement efforts (for example, to perform the measurements only when needed to predictions and/or only around the predicted time of the measurement event). This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to prepare for the wireless device mobility in advance (e.g, exchange the handover preparation messages with a neighbor base station in advance). This may allow to reduce probability of RLF and/or HOF.
  • the serving base station may prepare for the wireless device mobility in advance (e.g, exchange the handover preparation messages with a neighbor base station in advance). This may allow to reduce probability of RLF and/or HOF.
  • the wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting RLF. This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to handover the wireless device to another cell and to avoid the RLF. This may allow to reduce probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting HOF. This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to take action to try to avoid the HOF, e.g, try to find another cell for the handover of the wireless device and/or do not perform the handover.
  • the mechanism may be an artificial intelligence (Al) model and/or a machine learning (ML) model and/or an AI/ML model or any other model and/or algorithm and/or mechanism that may determine one or more predictions of one or more output parameters based on one or more input parameters.
  • Al artificial intelligence
  • ML machine learning
  • AI/ML model any other model and/or algorithm and/or mechanism that may determine one or more predictions of one or more output parameters based on one or more input parameters.
  • a wireless device may operate in an environment where there are many small cells.
  • the wireless device may have multiple serving cells (e.g, PCell, PSCell, multiple SCells) and may have multiple neighbor cells (e.g, tens of neighbor cells). Serving cells and neighbor cells may be changing very often due to mobility.
  • the wireless device may be configured to perform predictions on the serving cells and/or on the neighbor cells.
  • the predictions may comprise one or more measurement event predictions (e.g, event A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, etc.).
  • the predictions may comprise one or more RLF predictions in the serving cells.
  • the predictions may comprise one or more HOF predictions of one or more neighbor cells that are candidate cells for the mobility (e.g, handover) of the wireless device.
  • the number of configured predictions may be very large to cover, for example, all the serving cells and all the neighbor cells. Also, due to mobility of the wireless device, there may be multiple predictions for the same cell at different points of time (e.g., 1 second from now, 7 seconds from now, 11 seconds from now).
  • the wireless device may send all the results of the configured predictions to the serving base station.
  • the wireless device may add an additional information to each of the prediction, for example, signal measurements and/or predictions of one or more cells associated with the predicted event. This may require a lot of data transmission from the wireless device to the base station. This may consume a lot of radio resource that otherwise may be used for user data transmission. This may result in degradation of the capacity and/or throughput.
  • Not all predictions may be useful for the serving base station.
  • the wireless device predicts an RLF and predicts a probability of the RLF as 90%, this may be useful prediction for the serving base station. If the wireless device predicts an RLF and predicts a probability of the RLF as 30%, this may be not very useful prediction for the serving base station.
  • the serving base station uses this prediction for the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, and the handover is successful, this may be useful prediction for the serving base station. If the wireless device predicts an event A3 (neighbor becomes amount of offset better than PCell) between a first (serving) cell and a second (neighbor) cell, the serving base station uses this prediction for the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, and a HOF happens during the handover, this may be not useful prediction or even harmful prediction for the serving base station.
  • the implementation of the existing technologies may result in unnecessary and/or excessive signaling to transmit all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations, even if not all of the predictions are useful and/or needed at the serving base stations. This may result in a waste of radio resources that otherwise may be used for user data transmission. This may result in degradation of the radio network capacity and/or throughput.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure are related to an approach for solving the problems described above. These and other features of the present disclosure are described further below.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing the one or more additional conditions for reporting predictions. This may improve the radio network capacity and/or throughput.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an SHO between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing additional conditions for reporting the predictions.
  • the additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the additional conditions may comprise comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
  • the third event may comprise one or more measurement events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more unintended events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more intended events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more time events.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A6.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event B1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event B2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event 11.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event C1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event C2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event D1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event D2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event T 1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A3.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A4.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A5.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event X1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event X2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Z1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H2.
  • the event A1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1.
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP).
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ).
  • the signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • the hysteresis of the event A1 may refer to a hysteresis parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A1.
  • the threshold of the event A1 may refer to an a1 -Threshold parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A1.
  • the signal metric of the first cell (e.g, serving cell of the wireless device) may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the hysteresis of the event A1 may be expressed in dB.
  • the threshold of the event A1 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell.
  • the event A2 may comprises an event when a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
  • the hysteresis of the event A2 may refer to a hysteresis parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A2.
  • the threshold of the event A2 may refer to an a2-Threshold parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A2.
  • the signal metric of the first cell (e.g., serving cell of the wireless device) may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the hysteresis of the event A2 may be expressed in dB.
  • the threshold of the event A2 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell.
  • the event A3 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the second cell).
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfig NR information element).
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell (e.g, offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the first cell).
  • the cell specific offset of the first cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the SpCell cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell).
  • the hysteresis of the event A3 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A3 (e.g., hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A3).
  • the offset of the event A3 may refer to the offset parameter for the event A3 (e.g., a3-Offset parameter in reportConfigN R information element for the event A3).
  • the signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the first cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the hysteresis of the event A2 may be expressed in dB.
  • the offset of the event A3 may be expressed in dB.
  • the event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell).
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., cell I ndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigN R information element).
  • the hysteresis of the event A4 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A4 (e.g., hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR for the event A4).
  • the threshold of the event A4 may refer to the threshold parameter for the event A4 (e.g, a4-Threshold parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A4).
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the hysteresis of the event A4 may be expressed in dB.
  • the threshold of the event A4 may be expressed in in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell.
  • the event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event A5 and the second condition of the event A5 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5.
  • the second condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
  • the hysteresis of the event A5 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A5 (e.g, hysteresis as defined within reportConfigN R for this event).
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the second cell).
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigN information element).
  • the first threshold of the event A5 may refer to the first threshold parameter for the event A5 (e.g, a5- Thresholdl parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A5).
  • the second threshold of the event A5 may refer to the second threshold parameter for the event A5 (e.g, a5- Threshold2 parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A5).
  • the signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the hysteresis of the event A5 may be expressed in dB.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the first threshold of the event A5 may be expressed in in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell.
  • the second threshold of the event A5 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell.
  • the event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g , celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element).
  • the hysteresis of the event A6 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A6 (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A6).
  • the cell specific offset of the first cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the serving cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigNR information element).
  • the offset of the event A6 may refer to the offset parameter for the event A6 (e.g, a6-Offset parameter in reportConfigNR information element for the event A6).
  • the signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the hysteresis of the event A6 may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the first cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the offset of the event A6 may be expressed in dB.
  • the event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell).
  • the inter-RAT neighbor cell e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element).
  • celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element.
  • the hysteresis of the event B1 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event B1 (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information elementfor the event B1).
  • the threshold of the event B1 may refer to the threshold parameter for the event B1 (e.g, b1 - ThresholdEUTRA parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1 and/or b1 -ThresholdUTRA- FDD parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1).
  • the threshold parameter for the event B1 e.g, b1 - ThresholdEUTRA parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1 and/or b1 -ThresholdUTRA- FDD parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1).
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the hysteresis of the event B1 may be expressed in dB.
  • the threshold of the event B1 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell.
  • the event B2 may comprise an event when both of a first condition of the event B2 and a second condition of the event B2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2.
  • the second condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
  • the hysteresis of the event B2 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event B2 (e.g. , hysteresis parameter in reportConfigl nterRAT information elementfor the event B2).
  • the first threshold of the event B2 may refer to the first threshold parameter for the event B2 (e.g., b2- Thresholdl parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information elementfor the event B2).
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell).
  • the inter-RAT neighbor cell e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element.
  • the second threshold of the event B2 may refer to the second threshold parameter for the event B2 (e.g, b2- Threshold2 EUTRA parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B2 and/or b2- Threshold2 UT A-FD D parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B2).
  • the signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
  • the hysteresis of the event B2 may be expressed in dB.
  • the first threshold of the event B2 may be expressed in the same units as the signal metric of the first cell.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
  • the second threshold of the event B2 may be expressed in the same units as the signal metric of the second cell.
  • the event 11 comprises an event when a measurement of an interference decreased by a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11.
  • the hysteresis of the event 11 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for this event (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for this event).
  • the threshold of the event 11 may refer to the threshold parameter for this event (e.g., i1 -Threshold parameter in reportConfig NR information element for this event).
  • the interference may be expressed in dBm.
  • the hysteresis of the event 11 may be expressed in dB.
  • the threshold of the event 11 may be expressed in dBm.
  • the event C1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio decreased by a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1.
  • the event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
  • the event D1 may comprises an event when both of the first condition of the event D1 and the second condition of the event D1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1.
  • the second condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
  • the event D2 may comprise an event when both of the first condition of the event D2 and the second condition of the event D2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2.
  • the second condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2.
  • conditional event T1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
  • conditional event A3 may comprise the event A3.
  • conditional event A4 may comprise the event A4.
  • conditional event A5 may comprise the event A5.
  • conditional event D1 may comprise the event D1.
  • conditional event D2 may comprise the event D2.
  • event X1 may comprise an event when both the first condition of the event X1 and the second condition of the event X1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1.
  • the second condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
  • the event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
  • the event Y1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Y1 and a second condition of the event Y1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1.
  • the second condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1.
  • the event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
  • the event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Z1 and a second condition of the event Z1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1.
  • the second condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
  • the event H1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1.
  • the event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
  • the event A3H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H1 and a second condition of the event A3H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1.
  • the second condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
  • the event A3H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H2 and a second condition of the event A3H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2.
  • the second condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
  • the event A4H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H1 and a second condition of the event A4H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1.
  • the second condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
  • the event A4H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H2 and a second condition of the event A4H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2.
  • the second condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
  • the event A5H1 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H1 and a second condition of the event A5H1 and a third condition of the event A5H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1.
  • the second condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1.
  • the third condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H 1.
  • the event A5H2 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H2 and a second condition of the event A5H2 and a third condition of the event A5H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the second condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the third condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a first cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • a radio link failure (RLF) event may refer to an event when the wireless device loses connection with the first cell and/or the second cell.
  • the first cell and/or the second cell may be serving cells of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may be serving cell of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may be serving cell of the wireless device before handover to the second cell.
  • the second may be serving cell of the wireless device after handover from the first cell.
  • a signal level of the serving cell may experience a degradation with time.
  • a signal metric e.g. , RSRP and/or RSRQ and/or SINR
  • the threshold may correspond to a threshold below which it is not possible to receive the reference signal of the serving cell and/or a threshold below which it is not possible to have a reliable communication with the serving cell.
  • the wireless device may start a timer T310.
  • an RLF event happens (e.g, the wireless device declares the RLF event).
  • the RLF event may require the wireless device to stop communication with the serving cell and start a connection reestablishment procedure (e.g, find a new cell and try to connect to the new cell).
  • a handover failure may happen.
  • an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device. This may refer to HOF.
  • an RLF may happen in the second cell during the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell or shortly after the handover. This may refer to HOF.
  • an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device. This may refer to too late handover.
  • the wireless device may undergo handover back to the first cell. This may refer to too early handover.
  • the wireless device may experience handover to a cell other than the first cell. This may refer to handover to a wrong cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may refer to one or more failure events.
  • the one or more intended events may comprise a successful handover (SHO) event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • SHO successful handover
  • the SHO event may refer to an event when a handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell is successful.
  • the one or more intended events may refer to one or more successful events.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
  • the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a measurement event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an unintended event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an intended event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a time event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted start time of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted end time of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted duration of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
  • ToS predicted time of stay
  • the predicted time of a second event may comprise a predicted duration of the wireless device staying the first cell and/or the second cell.
  • the predicted time of a second event may comprise a predicted time of stay of the wireless device in the first cell and/or in the second cell.
  • the second event threshold may comprise a point in time.
  • the second event threshold may comprise a time interval.
  • the second event threshold may comprise a ToS threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • the measurement event may comprise an event A3 (e.g, the second cell becomes offset better than the first cell) or another handover related measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may comprise, for example, comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to the ToS threshold.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the measurement event A3 if the predicted ToS in the second cell is greater than the ToS threshold (e.g, 5 seconds or 10 seconds).
  • the one or more conditions may comprise, for example, comparing the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to the threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the measurement event A3 if the probability of the SHO is greater than the threshold probability of the SHO (e.g, 90% or 95%).
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell if the prediction of the probability of the RLF is greater than the threshold probability of the RLF (e.g. , 50% or 75%).
  • the threshold probability of the RLF e.g. 50% or 75%).
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the RLF is greater than the threshold probability of the RLF (e.g., 80% or 90%).
  • the threshold probability of the RLF e.g., 80% or 90%
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the HOF is greater than the threshold probability of the HOF (e.g., 50% or 60%).
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the SHO is greater than the threshold probability of the SHO (e.g, 90% or 95%).
  • the threshold probability of the SHO e.g, 90% or 95%).
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the ToS in the second cell if the prediction of the ToS is greater than the threshold ToS (e.g., 10 seconds or 20 seconds).
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • the first cell may comprise a serving cell of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a neighbor of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
  • SCell secondary cell
  • inter-RAT inter radio access technology
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the third event.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more measurement object parameters may comprise, for example, SSB frequency parameters and/or SSB subcarrier spacing parameters reference signal configuration parameters etc.
  • the one or more reporting configuration parameters may comprise, for example, parameters indicating to perform periodic and/or event triggered measurements and/or configuration parameters of the measurement events (e.g, events A1,A2, A3 etc.).
  • the configuration parameters of one or more predicted times may comprise, for example, minimum duration and/or ToS and/or maximum duration and/or ToS etc.
  • the configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event may comprise, for example, a time interval during which the wireless device may perform the prediction (e.g., between 10 seconds and 20 seconds from now).
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a type of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction the third event will happen.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a probability of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted time of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
  • the prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the measurement event (e.g., event A1 , A2, A3 etc.).
  • the prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the unintended event (e.g, RLF event and/or HOF event).
  • the prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the intended event (e.g, SHO).
  • the prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the time (e.g, staying in the first cell and/or the second cell).
  • the one or more cells associated with the third event may comprise, for example, the first cell and/or the second cell.
  • the cell associated with the third event may comprise, for example, the second cell.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted start time of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP).
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ).
  • the signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • the handover may comprise a handover.
  • the handover may comprise a conditional handover.
  • the handover may comprise a dual connectivity reconfiguration.
  • the handover may comprise a multiple connectivity reconfiguration.
  • the handover may comprise a cell switch.
  • the handover may comprise a cell change.
  • the handover may comprise a layer 11 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM).
  • the handover may comprise a conditional LTM.
  • the wireless device may receive from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC messages.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC resume message.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise a prediction configuration message.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise, for example, a radio bearer configuration (e.g, radio BearerConfig parameter).
  • the one or more first messages may comprise a measurement configuration (e.g., measConfig parameter).
  • the one or more first messages may comprise a conditional reconfiguration (e.g., conditionalReconfiguration-r16).
  • the wireless device may send to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise an RRC messages.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise a measurement report message.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise a prediction report message.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise, for example, measurement results (e.g., measResults parameter).
  • the measurement results may comprise measurement results for serving cells (e.g, measResu ItServing MOList parameter).
  • the measurement results may comprise measurement results for neighbor cells (e.g, measResultNeighCells parameter).
  • FIG. 38 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event
  • Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing the one or more additional conditions for reporting predictions. This may improve the radio network capacity and/or throughput.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
  • the third event may comprise one or more measurement events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more unintended events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more intended events.
  • the third event may comprise one or more time events.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A6.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event B1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event B2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event 11.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event C1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event C2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event D1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event D2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event T 1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A3.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A4.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A5.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event X1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event X2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event Z1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H2.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H1.
  • the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H2.
  • the event A1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1.
  • the event A2 may comprises an event when a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
  • the event A3 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
  • the event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
  • the event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event A5 and the second condition of the event A5 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5.
  • the second condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
  • the event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6.
  • the event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
  • the event B2 may comprise an event when both of a first condition of the event B2 and a second condition of the event B2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2.
  • the second condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
  • the event 11 comprises an event when a measurement of an interference decreased by a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11.
  • the event C1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio decreased by a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1.
  • the event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
  • the event D1 may comprises an event when both of the first condition of the event D1 and the second condition of the event D1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1.
  • the second condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
  • the event D2 may comprise an event when both of the first condition of the event D2 and the second condition of the event D2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2.
  • the second condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2.
  • conditional event T 1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
  • conditional event A3 may comprise the event A3.
  • conditional event A4 may comprise the event A4.
  • conditional event A5 may comprise the event A5.
  • conditional event D1 may comprise the event D1.
  • conditional event D2 may comprise the event D2.
  • the event X1 may comprise an event when both the first condition of the event X1 and the second condition of the event X1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1.
  • the second condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
  • the event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
  • the event Y1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Y1 and a second condition of the event Y1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1.
  • the second condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1.
  • the event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
  • the event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Z1 and a second condition of the event Z1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1.
  • the second condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
  • the event H1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1.
  • the event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
  • the event A3H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H1 and a second condition of the event A3H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1.
  • the second condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
  • the event A3H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H2 and a second condition of the event A3H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2.
  • the second condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
  • the event A4H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H1 and a second condition of the event A4H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1.
  • the second condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
  • the event A4H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H2 and a second condition of the event A4H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2.
  • the second condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
  • the event A5H1 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H1 and a second condition of the event A5H1 and a third condition of the event A5H1 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1.
  • the second condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1.
  • the third condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H 1.
  • the event A5H2 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H2 and a second condition of the event A5H2 and a third condition of the event A5H2 are satisfied.
  • the first condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the second condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the third condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a first cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more unintended events may comprise a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more intended events may comprise a successful handover (SHO) event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • SHO successful handover
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell.
  • the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
  • the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a measurement event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an unintended event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an intended event.
  • the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a time event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted start time of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted end time of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted duration of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event.
  • the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
  • ToS predicted time of stay
  • the second event threshold may comprise a point in time.
  • the second event threshold may comprise a time interval.
  • the second event threshold may comprise a ToS threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
  • the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • the first cell may comprise a serving cell of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device.
  • the first cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a neighbor of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device.
  • the second cell may comprise a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
  • SCell secondary cell
  • inter-RAT inter radio access technology
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the third event.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement identities.
  • a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a type of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction the third event will happen.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a probability of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted time of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event.
  • the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted start time of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP).
  • the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ).
  • the signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal.
  • the reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • the handover may comprise a handover.
  • the handover may comprise a conditional handover.
  • the handover may comprise a dual connectivity reconfiguration.
  • the handover may comprise a multiple connectivity reconfiguration.
  • the handover may comprise a cell switch.
  • the handover may comprise a cell change.
  • the handover may comprise a layer 11 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM).
  • the handover may comprise a conditional LTM.
  • the wireless device may receive from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC messages.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC resume message.
  • the one or more first messages may comprise a prediction configuration message.
  • the wireless device may send to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise an RRC messages.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise a measurement report message.
  • the one or more second messages may comprise a prediction report message.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
  • Clause 3 The method of clause 2, further comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
  • a method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold; and receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
  • a method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold.
  • Clause 6 The method of clause 5, further comprising receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
  • Clause 7 The method of any preceding clause, wherein the third event comprises: one or more measurement events; one or more unintended events; one or more intended events; and/or one or more time events.
  • the one or more measurement events comprises: an event A1; an event A2; an event A3; an event A4; an event A5; an event A6; an event B1; an event B2; an event 11; an event C1 ; an event C2; an event D1 ; an event D2; a conditional event T1 ; a conditional event A3; a conditional event A4; a conditional event A5; a conditional event D1; a conditional event D2; an event X1; an event X2; an event Y1; an event Y2; an event Z1; an event H1; an event H2; an event A3H1; an event A3H2; an event A4H1; an event A4H2; an event A5H1 ; and/or an event A5H2.
  • the event A1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1.
  • the event A2 comprises an event when: a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
  • the event A3 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
  • the event A4 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
  • the event A5 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5; and a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
  • the event A6 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6.
  • the event B1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
  • the event B2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2; and a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
  • the event C2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
  • the event D1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1 ; and a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
  • the event D2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2; and a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2.
  • conditional event T 1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
  • the event X1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1 ; and a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
  • the event X2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
  • the event Y1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1; and a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1.
  • the event Y2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
  • the event Z1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1 ; and a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
  • the event H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1.
  • the event H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
  • the event A3H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1 ; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
  • the event A3H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
  • the event A4H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1 ; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
  • the event A4H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
  • the event A5H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1 ; and a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H1.
  • the event A5H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2; and a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
  • the one or more unintended events comprises: a radio link failure event in a first cell; a radio link failure event in a second cell; a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell; a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell; a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell; and/or a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the one or more intended events comprises: a successful handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
  • the wireless device staying in the first cell comprises: the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode; and/or the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the wireless device staying in the second cell comprises: the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode; and/or the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
  • the first event threshold comprises: a threshold probability of a measurement event; a threshold probability of an unintended event; a threshold probability of an intended event; and/or a threshold probability of a time event.
  • the predicted time of the second event comprises: a predicted start time of the second event; a predicted end time of the second event; a predicted duration of the second event; a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event; and/or a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
  • ToS predicted time of stay
  • Clause 50 The method of any preceding clause, wherein the second event threshold comprises: a point in time; a time interval; a ToS threshold.
  • the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold comprises: determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold; and/or determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
  • the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold comprises: determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold; and/or determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold; comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; or comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an SHO between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
  • a method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
  • the first cell comprises: a serving cell of the wireless device; a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device; a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device; a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device; and/or a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
  • PCell primary cell
  • PSCell primary secondary cell
  • SpCell special cell
  • SCell secondary cell
  • the second cell comprises: a neighbor of the wireless device; a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device; an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device; and/or a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
  • SCell secondary cell
  • inter-RAT inter radio access technology
  • the configuration parameters comprise: one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events; one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events; one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events; one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events; and/or one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the third event comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
  • the prediction of the third event comprises: a prediction of a type of the third event; a prediction the third event will happen; a prediction of a probability of the third event; a predicted time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event; one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event; and/or a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
  • the predicted time of the third event comprises: a predicted start time of the third event; a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the predicted duration of the third event comprises: a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
  • the signal metric comprises: a reference signal received power (RSRP); a reference signal received quality (RS RQ); and/or a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • RS RQ reference signal received quality
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the reference signal comprises: a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal; and/or a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • the handover comprises: a handover; a conditional handover; a dual connectivity reconfiguration; a multiple connectivity reconfiguration; a cell switch; a cell change; a layer 1 1 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM); a conditional LTM.
  • Clause 71 The method of any preceding clause, comprising receiving, by the wireless device from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
  • Clause 72 The method of any preceding clause, comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
  • Clause 73 The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more first messages comprises: an RRC message; an RRC reconfiguration message; an RRC resume message; and/or a prediction configuration message.
  • Clause 74 The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more second messages comprises: an RRC message; a measurement report message; and/or a prediction report message.
  • Clause 75 An apparatus comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of clauses 1 to 74.
  • Clause 76 A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of clauses 1 to 74.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A method can include receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions can be based on at least one of comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold. The method can also include sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.

Description

TITLE
Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
[0001] This application is related to and claims the priority of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/641,190, filed May 1, 2024, the entirety of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0002] Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosure are described herein with reference to the drawings.
[0003] FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure maybe implemented.
[0004] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
[0005] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0006] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0007] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
[0008] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
[0009] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
[0010] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
[0011] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
[0012] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
[0013] FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
[0014] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
[0015] FIG. 11 A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
[0016] FIG. 11 B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
[0017] FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
[0018] FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure. [0019] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
[0020] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. [0021] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
[0022] FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission.
[0023] FIG. 17 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0024] FIG. 18 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0025] FIG. 19 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0026] FIG. 20 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0027] FIG. 21 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0028] FIG. 22 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0029] FIG. 23 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0030] FIG. 24 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0031] FIG. 25 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0032] FIG. 26 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0033] FIG. 27 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0034] FIG. 28 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0035] FIG. 29 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0036] FIG. 30 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0037] FIG. 31 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0038] FIG. 32 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0039] FIG. 33 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0040] FIG. 34 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0041] FIG. 35 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0042] FIG. 36 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0043] FIG. 37 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
[0044] FIG. 38 illustrates an aspect of an example embodiment according to the present disclosure.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0045] In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examples of how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how the disclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternative embodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of the described exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosed example embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments within the scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight the functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments.
[0046] Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols. [0047] A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
[0048] In this disclosure, "a" and "an” and similar phrases are to be interpreted as “at least one” and "one or more.” Similarly, any term that ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to be interpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” is indicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms “comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or more components of the element being described. The term “comprises” is interchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumerated components from being included in the element being described. By contrast, “consists of provides a complete enumeration of the one or more components of the element being described. The term “based on”, as used herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” rather than, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used herein represents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example, “A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A, B, and C.
[0049] If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets and subsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B = {celH , cell2} are: {celH}, {cell2}, and {celH , cell2}. The phrase “based on” (or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “in response at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “employing/usi ng” (or equally “employi ng/using at least”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/usi ng” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
[0050] The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that affect or implement the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
[0051] In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, or Information elements: lEs) may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. For example, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, and N comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in the plurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages, but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages.
[0052] Many features presented are described as being optional through the use of “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity and legibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each and every permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set of optional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted as explicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a system described as having three optional features may be embodied in seven ways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any two of the three possible features or with three of the three possible features.
[0053] Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may be implemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g., hardware with a biological element), or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) ora modeling/si mulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVI E WMathScript. It may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that inco rporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.
[0054] FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure maybe implemented. The mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
[0055] The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g, the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
[0056] The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0057] The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle roadside unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
[0058] The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, Wi-Fi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof. A base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
[0059] A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface. For example, one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
[0060] In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of base stations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
[0061] The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network. In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called "hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
[0062] The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN). Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG. 1 A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those of future networks yet to be specified (e.g , a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.
[0063] FIG. 1B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1B, mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1 A.
[0064] The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality. Compared to the CN of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g, a cloud-based platform).
[0065] As illustrated in FIG. 1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1B for ease of illustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g, packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session. The UEs 156 maybe configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
[0066] The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g, control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a CN and a UE, and AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN.
[0067] The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1 B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
[0068] The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one or more g NBs, illustrated as g NB 160A and g NB 160B (collectively g NBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 maybe more generically referred to as base stations. The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
[0069] As shown in FIG. 1 B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 1 B, g N B 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0070] The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. The gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
[0071] The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.
[0072] The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g, initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
[0073] As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. A protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0074] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
[0075] FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of the protocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OS I) model. The next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MACs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDCPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
[0076] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top of FIG. 2A and FIG. 3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling. The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g, the UPF 158B) may map IP packets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoS requirements (e.g, in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. The mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.
[0077] The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-g NB handover. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
[0078] Although not shown in FIG. 3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
[0079] The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
[0080] The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
211 and 221. The MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the gNB 220 (at the MAC 222) fordownlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g, one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs
212 and 222 may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223. [0081] The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212 and 222.
[0082] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack. FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the g NB 220. An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
[0083] The downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers. In FIG. 4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
[0084] The remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g, with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. For example, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
[0085] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
[0086] FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. For example, FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE.
[0087] Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
[0088] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. A logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
[0089] -- a paging control channel (PCCH) for carrying paging messages used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on a cell level;
[0090] -- a broadcast control channel (BCCH) for carrying system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell;
[0091] - a common control channel (CCCH) for carrying control messages together with random access;
[0092] - a dedicated control channel (DCCH) for carrying control messages to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and
[0093] -- a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data to/from a specific the UE.
[0094] Transport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface. The set of transport channels defined by NR includes, for example: [0095] -- a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
[0096] -- a broadcast channel (BCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH;
[0097] -- a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH;
[0098] -- an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages; and
[0099] - a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the network without any prior scheduling. [0100] The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels. The PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
[0101] -- a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCH;
[0102] -- a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH , as well as paging messages from the PCH;
[0103] -- a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying downlink control information (DCI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands;
[0104] -- a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages from the UL- SCH and in some instances uplink control information (U Cl) as described below;
[0105] -- a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI , which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and
[0106] -- a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.
[0107] Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
[0108] FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. Instead of having the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR user plane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
[0109] The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g, the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the CN. The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management. [0110] The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
[0111] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. The UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1 A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated in FIG. 6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g, RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g, RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g, RRCJNACTIVE).
[0112] In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure. The base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRC context, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station. These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. While in RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell and neighboring cells and report these measurements to the base station currently serving the UE. The UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610. [0113] In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. In RRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
[0114] In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608.
[0115] An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. In RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network. The mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI).
[0116] Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN (e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152) may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE's location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
[0117] RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRC inactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. A RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE's RAN notification area.
[0118] A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
[0119] A gNB, such as g NBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split into two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY.
[0120] In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed with respect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g, M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol. After some processing (e.g, addition of a cyclic prefix) and up-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PARR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
[0121] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. As illustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
[0122] The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g, cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 pis. For example, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps. [0123] A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g . , 14 OFDM symbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency, scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
[0124] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An NR carrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275*12 = 3300 subcarriers. Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
[0125] FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
[0126] NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g, up to 400 MHz fora subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g, due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE's receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
[0127] NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation. In an example, a BWP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g, via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g, up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
[0128] For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP. [0129] Fora downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primary cell (PCell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information. The search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in an active downlink BWP.
[0130] Foran uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions. A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g, PDCCH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
[0131] One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.
[0132] A base station may semi-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
[0133] A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DCI during an interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
[0134] In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g, if the second BWP is the default BWP). [0135] Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DCI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access. [0136] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example of FIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.
[0137] If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
[0138] To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can be aggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE using carrier aggregation (CA). The aggregated carriers in CA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). When CA is used, there are a number of serving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
[0139] FIG. 10A illustrates the three CA configurations with two CCs. In the intraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband, non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap. In the in terband configuration 1006, the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
[0140] In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
[0141] When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC) . In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).
[0142] Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell). [0143] Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling. The DCI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink control information (e.g, HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on the PUCCH of the PCell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, the PUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCCH groups.
[0144] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups. A PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCH group 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively. In the example of FIG. 10B, the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: a PCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCCH group 1050 includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink CCs may be configured as a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more other uplink CCs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCsof the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UC1 1031, UC1 1032, and UC1 1033, maybe transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1050, shown as UC1 1071, UC1 1072, and UC1 1073, maybe transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cells depicted in FIG. 10B were not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and the PUCCH group 1050, a single uplink PCell to transmit UCI relating to the downlink CCs, and the PCell may become overloaded. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PSCell 1061, overloading may be prevented.
[0145] A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In the disclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
[0146] In CA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In an example, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
[0147] In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g, unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A). In the uplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B). The PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.
[0148] FIG. 11 A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG. 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
[0149] The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11 A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 0FDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g, two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g, across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
[0150] The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g, if the UE is searching for the cell). To find and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In an example, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
[0151] The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
[0152] The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The Ml B may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell. The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ). The SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCCH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
[0153] The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH block transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices.
[0154] SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell). In an example, a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, and a second SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
[0155] In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
[0156] The CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs. The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. The UE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g, the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation. [0157] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource. The base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
[0158] The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. The base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.
[0159] The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols fordownlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
[0160] Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. A front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g, one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g, a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE . A radio network may support (e.g, at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
[0161] In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
[0162] A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
[0163] Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g, modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
[0164] The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. For example, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel. The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g, one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g, maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR network may support (e.g, for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
[0165] A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSsforthe PUSCH.
[0166] Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. For example, uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
[0167] SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, an SRS resource in an SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats. In an example, at least one DCI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DCI formats. In an example, when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
[0168] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g, an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
[0169] An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
[0170] Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example, a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals. The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.
[0171] FIG. 11 B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. A square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs. One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g, RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g, symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g, subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g, QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.
[0172] The three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beams used for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbols from beams of other UEs.
[0173] CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.
[0174] In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g., measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl). [0175] FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1 , P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1 ). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
[0176] FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g, to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1). Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counterclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
[0177] A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on the initiation of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g, having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
[0178] The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g, a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g, Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
[0179] A network (e.g, a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE may initiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRCJDLE state and/or an RRCJNACTIVE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g, for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g, when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g, other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. A network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
[0180] FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314. The Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble). The Msg 21312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
[0181] The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGenerai); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated). The base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRC_I NACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313. Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 21312 and the Msg 41314.
[0182] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311. The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-Config Index). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals maybe SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
[0183] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 31313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g, a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 31313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g. , an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g, a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
[0184] The Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g, a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g, group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or more preambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 31313. The UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g, rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
[0185] The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 31313. As another example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g, group A and group B). A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association is configured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association. The Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g, SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g, ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionLisf) may indicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or more reference signals. [0186] The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network. The UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g, SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g, PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g, preambleTransMax). [0187] The Msg 21312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios, the Msg 2 1312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs. The Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311. The Msg 2 1312 maybe scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station. The Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 31313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g, ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312. The UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example of RA-RNTI may be as follows:
[0188] RA-RNTI = 1 + sjd + 14 x tjd + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id, where sjd may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 < sjd < 14), tjd may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 < tjd < 80), fjd may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 < fjd < 8), and ul_carrierjd may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
[0189] The UE may transmit the Msg 31313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312). The Msg 31313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A. In some scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g, using the Msg 31313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. To perform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 31313 (e.g, a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
[0190] The Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 31313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 31313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g, if the UE is in an RRC_I DLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g, transmitted) in Msg 31313, the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed. [0191] The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 31313) in one or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
[0192] FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. The configuration message 1320 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322. The Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 2 1322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively. As will be understood from FIGS. 13A and 13B, the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 31313 and/or the Msg 41314.
[0193] The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321. The UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).
[0194] After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of a beam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceld). The UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. In the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B, the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
[0195] FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
[0196] Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG. 13A. The transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g, an SR, a HARQ AC K/NACK, and/or the like). The UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 21312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
[0197] The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g, LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g, licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
[0198] The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g, a PRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 (e.g, a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.
[0199] The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g, delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g, an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)). The base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g, a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g, a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g, the transport block 1342). [0200] A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g, layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g, layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
[0201] The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DCI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
[0202] A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
[0203] DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 31313 illustrated in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.
[0204] Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DCI, the base station may transmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats. For example, DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g. , with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs. DCI format 2 J may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
[0205] After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) maybe 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
[0206] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain. In the example of FIG. 14A, a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain. [0207] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET.
[0208] The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregation level. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set. A set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set of CCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g, C-RNTI).
[0209] As shown in FIG. 14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats. The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g, scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g, a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
[0210] The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g, uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARQ acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE may transmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g, comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g, HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) ora physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.
[0211] There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH format based on a size of the UCI (e.g, a number of uplink symbols of UCI transmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may transmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-AC K/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of H ARQ-AC K/S R bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code. PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
[0212] The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g. , up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid, and/or a number (e.g., a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configured with a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g, HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to "0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the first configured value and less than or equal to a second configured value, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g, 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3''.
[0213] After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g, with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. A three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resource indicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.
[0214] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
[0215] The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0216] In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
[0217] After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed by the processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (Ml MO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0218] At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wireless device 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, Ml MO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
[0219] As shown in FIG. 15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g. , single-user Ml MO or multi-user Ml MO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
[0220] The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may be associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory 1514 and memory 1524 (e.g, one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application. Although not shown in FIG. 15, the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g, one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
[0221] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, i npu t/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
[0222] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively. [0223] FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. A baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transform precoding is not enabled, a CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission may be generated by FIG. 16A. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0224] FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0225] FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. A baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0226] FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0227] A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g, RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g., primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g., two or more base stations in dual connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one or more messages (e.g, as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, and RRC layers for configuring the wireless device. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels. [0228] A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with a value (e.g, the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g, due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process. When the specification refers to an implementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will be understood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or more timers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure. For example, a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry (or expiration) of a random access response window timer, the time difference between two time stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted. Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
[0229] FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a handover in a radio access network.
[0230] The BS1 and the UE may perform measurement control and reports 1701. The BS1 may send to the UE, one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for the UE measurements procedures. The UE may send to the BS1, one or more messages comprising measurement results determined based on the configuration parameters.
[0231] The BS1 may determine a handover decision 1702 for the UE based on the measurement results received from the UE (e.g, MeasurementReport) and/or radio resource management (RRM) information.
[0232] The BS1 may send to the BS2, a handover request 1703 requesting the BS2 to prepare resources for the handover of the UE from a cell of the BS1 (e.g, source cell) to a cell of the BS2 (e.g, target cell). The handover request 1703 may comprise information required for the BS2 to perform admission control for the UE.
[0233] The handover request 1703 may comprise a list of E-UTRA radio access bearers (E-RABs) requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E- RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The BS2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0234] The handover request 1703 may comprise a list of protocol data unit (PDU) sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be setup list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The BS2 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0235] The BS2 may perform admission control 1704 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1703. [0236] The BS2 may prepare resources for the UE. The BS2 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge 1705. The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the cell of the BS2.
[0237] The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs admitted list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
[0238] The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1705 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0239] The UE, BS1, and BS2 perform RAN handover completion 1706.
[0240] The BS2 and the AMF perform path switch 1707. The path switch 1707 may comprise switching user data from the BS1 to the BS2.
[0241] The BS2 sends to the BS1, a UE context release 1708. After the BS1 receives the UE context release 1708, the BS1 is no longer required to keep the UE context.
[0242] FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a conditional handover in a radio access network.
[0243] The BS1 and the UE may perform measurement control and reports 1801. The BS1 may send to the UE, one or more messages comprising one or more configuration parameters for the UE measurements procedures. The UE may send to the BS1, one or more messages comprising measurement results determined based on the configuration parameters.
[0244] The BS1 may determine a conditional handover decision 1802 for the UE based on the measurement results received from the UE (e.g., MeasurementReport) and/or radio resource management (RRM) information. The conditional handover decision may comprise determining one or more candidate cells of the one or more candidate BSs. For example, the one or more candidate cells of the one or more candidate BSs may comprise a first cell of the BS2 and a second cell of the BS3.
[0245] The BS1 may send to the BS2, a handover request 1803. The handover request 1803 may comprise information required for the BS2 to perform admission control for the UE.
[0246] The handover request 1803 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The BS2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0247] The handover request 1803 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be setup list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The BS2 may use the list of PD U sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0248] The BS1 may send to the BS3, a handover request 1804. The handover request 1804 may comprise information required for the BS3 to perform admission control for the UE.
[0249] The handover request 1804 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be setup list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The BS3 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0250] The handover request 1804 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources to be setup list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU session configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The BS3 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control for the UE.
[0251] The BS2 may perform admission control 1805 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1803.
[0252] The BS3 may perform admission control 1806 for the UE based on the information received from the BS1 in the handover request 1804.
[0253] The BS2 may prepare resources for the UE. The BS2 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge
1807. The handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the first cell of the BS2.
[0254] The handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
[0255] The handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1807 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0256] The BS3 may prepare resources for the UE. The BS3 may send to the BS1, a handover request acknowledge
1808. The handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the second cell of the BS3.
[0257] The handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs admitted list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs not admitted list). [0258] The handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of admitted PD U sessions for the UE (e.g. , PDU session resources admitted list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The handover request acknowledge 1808 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0259] The BS1 may sends to the UE, an RRCReconfiguration 1809. The RRCReconfiguration 1809 may comprise configuration parameters for the UE to connect to the first cell of the BS2 or to the second cell of the BS3. The RRCReconfiguration 1809 may comprise conditional handover execution conditions for the first cell of the BS2 and to the second cell of the BS3. The UE may send to the BS1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete 1810.
[0260] The UE may evaluate the conditional handover execution conditions for the first cell of the BS2 and to the second cell of the BS3. If the first cell of the BS2 satisfies the conditional handover execution conditions, the UE makes handover decision 1811 to the first cell of the BS2.
[0261] The UE, BS1, and BS2 perform RAN handover completion 1812.
[0262] The BS2 sends to the BS1, a handover success 1813 to inform the BS1 that the UE has successfully accessed the first cell of the BS2.
[0263] The BS1 sends to the BS3, a handover cancel 1814. After receiving the handover cancel 1814, the BS3 may release the resources reserved for the UE.
[0264] The BS2 and the AMF may perform path switch 1815. The path switch 1815 may comprise switching user data from the BS1 to the BS2.
[0265] The BS2 may send to the BS1, a UE context release 1816. After the BS1 receives the UE context release 1816, the BS1 may be no longer required to keep the UE context.
[0266] Multi-radio dual connectivity (MR-DC) is a dual connectivity (DC), where a UE capable of receiving signals from multiple BSs and/or transmitting signals to multiple BSs may be configured to use resources provided by two different BSs, one providing NR access and the other one providing either E-UTRA or NR access. One node may act as the master node (MN) and the other as the secondary node (SN). The MN and SN may be connected via a network interface. The MN may be connected to the core network. The core network may be EPC or 5GC.
[0267] In case the core network is EPC, there may be one option of dual connectivity.
[0268] MR-DC may be supported via E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity (EN-DC), in which a UE is connected to one eNB that acts as an MN and one gNB that acts as an SN. In this case g N B may also be called en-gNB.
[0269] In case the core network is 5GC, there may be three options of dual connectivity.
[0270] MR-DC may be supported via NG-RAN E-UTRA-NR dual connectivity (NGEN-DC), in which a UE is connected to one eNB that acts as an MN and one gNB that acts as an SN. In this case eNB may be call ng-eNB. [0271] MR-DC may be supported via NR-E-UTRA dual connectivity (NE-DC), in which a UE is connected to one gNB that acts as an MN and one eNB that acts as an SN. In this case eNB may be call ng-eNB. [0272] MR-DC may be supported via NR-NR dual connectivity (NR-DC), in which a UE is connected to one g N B that acts as an MN and another g N B that acts as an SN.
[0273] A cell of an MN to which a UE performs initial access in the MN is called primary cell (PCell). If, in addition to PCell, the UE uses one or more cells of the MN for carrier aggregation, these cells are called secondary cells (SCell). The PCell and SCell(s) of the MN form a master cell group (MCG).
[0274] A cell of an SN to which a UE performs initial access in the SN is called primary secondary cell (PSCell). If, in addition to PSCell, the UE uses one or more cells of the SN for carrier aggregation, these cells are called secondary cells (SCell). The PSCell and SCell(s) of the SN form a secondary cell group (SCG).
[0275] PCell and/or PSCell may also be called special cells (SpCell).
[0276] FIG. 19 illustrates an example of a secondary node addition procedure for EN-DC.
[0277] A secondary node addition procedure may be initiated by the MN and may be used to establish a UE context at the SN to provide resources from the SN to the UE.
[0278] The MN may send to the SN, SgNB addition request message 1901 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE. The SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN cells. The SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0279] The SgNB addition request message 1901 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g, E-RABs to be added list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0280] Based on the SgNB addition request message 1901, the SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE. The SN may also select one or more SCells for the UE.
[0281] The SN may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
[0282] The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 1902 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g, E-RABs not admitted list).
[0283] The MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 1903. The
RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 1903 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
[0284] The UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 1904 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration. [0285] The MN may send to the SN, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 1905, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
[0286] The SN may trigger random access procedure 1906 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
[0287] FIG. 20 illustrates an example of a secondary node addition procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
[0288] A secondary node addition procedure may be initiated by the MN and may be used to establish a UE context at the SN to provide resources from the SN to the UE.
[0289] The MN may send to the SN, SN addition request message 2001 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE. The SN addition request message 2001 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SN addition request message 2001 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN cells. The SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0290] The SN addition request message 2001 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The SN may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0291] Based on the SN addition request message 2001, the SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE. The SN may also select one or more SCells for the UE.
[0292] The SN may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2002. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2002 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a RRC configuration parameter.
[0293] The SN addition request acknowledge message 2002 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources admitted to be added list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2502 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0294] The MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2003. The RRC reconfiguration message 2003 may comprise the RRC configuration. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
[0295] The UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2004 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
[0296] The MN may send to the SN, SN reconfiguration complete message 2005, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully. [0297] The SN may trigger random access procedure 2006 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
[0298] FIG. 21 illustrates an example of a conditional secondary node addition procedure for EN-DC.
[0299] A conditional secondary node addition procedure may be used when there are more than one candidate secondary nodes for a UE.
[0300] The MN may send to the SN1, SgNB addition request message 2101 requesting the SN1 to allocate resources for the UE. The SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN1 cells. The SN1 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s). [0301] The SgNB addition request message 2101 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g. , E-RABs to be added list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN1 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0302] The MN may send to the SN2, SgNB addition request message 2102 requesting the SN2 to allocate resources for the UE. The SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN2 cells. The SN2 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s). [0303] The SgNB addition request message 2102 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g., E-RABs to be added list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN2 may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0304] Based on the SgNB addition request message 2101, the SN1 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN1 for the UE. The SN1 may also select one or more SCells of the SN1 for the UE.
[0305] Based on the SgNB addition request message 2102, the SN2 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN2 for the UE. The SN2 may also select one or more SCells of the SN2 for the UE.
[0306] The SN1 may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN1 in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
[0307] The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2103 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list). [0308] The SN2 may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN2 in an NR RRC configuration parameter.
[0309] The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2104 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
[0310] The MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2105. The RRCConnectionReconfiguration message 2105 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message from the SN1 and the NR RRC configuration message from the SN2.
[0311] The UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 2106 confirming that the UE is able to perform the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN2.
[0312] The UE may perform evaluation of execution conditions (e.g., conditions for SN addition) according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received NR RRC configuration from the SN2. For example, the execution conditions for at least one PSCell of the SN1 are met. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
[0313] The UE may send to the MN, RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message 2107 indicating that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
[0314] The MN may send to the SN1, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 2108, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
[0315] The MN may send to the SN2, SgNB release request message 2109, to cancel the conditional secondary node addition with the SN2.
[0316] The SN2 may send to the MN, SgNB release request message 2110 to confirm the cancellation.
[0317] The SN may trigger random access procedure 2111 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
[0318] FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a conditional secondary node addition procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
[0319] A conditional secondary node addition procedure may be used when there are more than one candidate secondary nodes for a UE.
[0320] The MN may send to the SN1, SN addition request message 2201 requesting the SN1 to allocate resources for the UE. The SN addition request message 2201 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SN addition request message 2201 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN1 cells. The SN1 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s). [0321] The SN addition request message 2201 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The SN1 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0322] The MN may send to the SN2, SN addition request message 2202 requesting the SN2 to allocate resources for the UE. The SN addition request message 2202 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information, including the UE capabilities. The SgNB addition request message 2202 may comprise the latest measurement results for SN2 cells. The SN2 may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0323] The SN addition request message 2202 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g., PDU session resources to be added list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The SN2 may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0324] Based on the SN addition request message 2201 , the SN1 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN1 for the UE. The SN1 may also select one or more SCells of the SN1 for the UE.
[0325] Based on the SN addition request message 2202, the SN2 may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select one or more candidate PSCells of the SN2 for the UE. The SN2 may also select one or more SCells of the SN2 for the UE.
[0326] The SN1 may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2203. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2203 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN1 in an RRC configuration parameter.
[0327] The SN addition request acknowledge message 2203 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2703 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0328] The SN2 may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2204. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration of the SN2 in an RRC configuration parameter.
[0329] The SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2204 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the LIE (e.g, PD U session resources not admitted list).
[0330] The MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2205. The RRC reconfiguration message 2205 may comprise the RRC configuration message from the SN1 and the RRC configuration message from the SN2.
[0331] The UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2206 confirming that the UE is able to perform the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received RRC configuration from the SN2.
[0332] The UE may perform evaluation of execution conditions (e.g., conditions for SN addition) according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1 and according to the received RRC configuration from the SN2. For example, the execution conditions for at least one PSCell of the SN1 are met. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
[0333] The UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2207 indicating that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration from the SN1.
[0334] The MN may send to the SN1, SN reconfiguration complete message 2208, informing the SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
[0335] The MN may send to the SN2, SN release request message 2209, to cancel the conditional secondary node addition with the SN2.
[0336] The SN2 may send to the MN, SN release request message 2210 to confirm the cancellation.
[0337] The SN may trigger random access procedure 2211 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated SN resources.
[0338] FIG. 23 illustrates an example of a secondary node initiated secondary node change procedure for EN-DC.
[0339] A secondary node change procedure may be initiated either by MN or SN and may be used to transfer a UE context from a source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from one SN to another.
[0340] The source SN (S-SN) may send to the MN, SgNB change required message 2301. The SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise target SN (T-SN) identifier. The SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information. The SgNB change required message 2301 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells. The T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0341] The MN may send to the T-SN, SgNB addition request message 2302 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE. The SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information. The SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells. The T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0342] The SgNB addition request message 2302 may comprise a list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE (e.g., E-RABs to be added list). The list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, DRB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN may use the list of E-RABs requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0343] Based on the SgNB addition request message 2302, the T-SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE. The T-SN may also select one or more S Cells for the UE.
[0344] The T-SN may send to the MN, SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a NR RRC configuration parameter.
[0345] The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise a list of admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs admitted to be added list). The list of admitted E-RABs for the UE may comprise E-RABs configuration, for example, E-RAB identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SgNB addition request acknowledge message 2303 may comprise a list of not admitted E-RABs for the UE (e.g., E-RABs not admitted list).
[0346] The MN may send to the UE, RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2304. The
RRCConnection Reconfiguration message 2304 may comprise the NR RRC configuration message. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
[0347] The UE may send to the MN, RRCConnection ReconfigurationComplete message 2305 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received NR RRC configuration.
[0348] The MN may send to the S-SN, SgNB change confirm message 2306, informing the S-SN that the resources allocated for the UE may be released.
[0349] The MN may send to the T-SN, SgNB reconfiguration complete message 2307, informing the T-SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
[0350] The T-SN may trigger random access procedure 2308 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated T-SN resources.
[0351] FIG. 24 illustrates an example of a secondary node initiated secondary node change procedure for MR-DC with 5GC.
[0352] A secondary node change procedure is initiated either by MN or SN and used to transfer a UE context from a source SN to a target SN and to change the SCG configuration in UE from one SN to another.
[0353] The source SN (S-SN) may send to the MN, SN change required message 2401. The SN change required message 2401 may comprise target SN (T-SN) identifier. The SN change required message 2401 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information. The SN change required message 2401 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells. The T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0354] The MN may send to the T-SN, SN addition request message 2402 requesting the SN to allocate resources for the UE. The SN addition request message 2402 may comprise the requested SCG configuration information. The SN addition request message 2402 may comprise the latest measurement results for T-SN cells. The T-SN may use the measurement results to select and configure the SCG cell(s).
[0355] The SN addition request message 2402 may comprise a list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources to be added list). The list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, S-NSSAI, QoS parameters etc. The SN may use the list of PDU sessions requested to be added for the UE to perform admission control and resource reservation for the UE.
[0356] Based on the SN addition request message 2402, the T-SN may perform admission control, resource reservation, and may select a PSCell for the UE. The T-SN may also select one or more S Cells for the UE.
[0357] The T-SN may send to the MN, SN addition request acknowledge message 2403. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2403 may comprise the new SCG radio resource configuration in a RRC configuration parameter.
[0358] The SN addition request acknowledge message 2403 may comprise a list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources admitted to be added list). The list of admitted PDU sessions for the UE may comprise PDU sessions configuration, for example, PDU session identifier, QoS parameters etc. The SN addition request acknowledge message 2903 may comprise a list of not admitted PDU sessions for the UE (e.g, PDU session resources not admitted list).
[0359] The MN may send to the UE, RRC reconfiguration message 2404. The RRC reconfiguration message 2404 may comprise the RRC configuration message. The UE may perform a reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
[0360] The UE may send to the MN, RRC reconfiguration complete message 2405 confirming that the UE has performed the reconfiguration procedure according to the received RRC configuration.
[0361] The MN may send to the S-SN, SN change confirm message 2406, informing the S-SN that the resources allocated for the UE may be released.
[0362] The MN may send to the T-SN, SN reconfiguration complete message 2407, informing the T-SN that the UE has completed the reconfiguration procedure successfully.
[0363] The T-SN may trigger random access procedure 2408 with the UE to perform the UE synchronization with the allocated T-SN resources.
[0364] FIG. 25 illustrates an example of an intra-g N B-DU LTM.
[0365] A UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2501 to a gNB-CU. The L3 measurement reports 2501 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
[0366] Based on the L3 measurement reports 2501 , the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. [0367] The gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU, a UE context modification request message 2502. The UE context modification request message 2502 may comprise a request for the gNB-DU to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the gNB-DU.
[0368] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2403. The UE context modification response message 2503 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. The lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration. [0369] The gNB-CU may send to the gNB-DU, a DL RRC message transfer message 2504. The DL RRC message transfer message 2504 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0370] The gNB-DU may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2505.
[0371] The UE may send to the gNB-DU, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2506.
[0372] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2507. The UL RRC message transfer message 2507 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2506.
[0373] The UE may send to the gNB-DU, L1 measurement reports 2508.
[0374] The gNB-DU, based on the L1 measurement reports 2508, may determine to start LTM execution for the UE. [0375] The gNB-DU may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2509 (e.g, a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command). The cell switch command 2509 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested. For example, the RRCReconfiguration message 2505 may comprise LTM configurations with identifiers 1, 2, and 3. The cell switch command 2509 may comprise LTM configuration identifier 2 requesting the UE to perform cell switch according to the parameters in the LTM configuration with identifier 2 from the LTM configurations in the RRCReconfiguration message 2405.
[0376] The UE, based on the cell switch command 2509, may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch). [0377] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2510. The access success message 2510 may comprise a target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
[0378] FIG. 26 illustrates an example of an inter-g N B-DU LTM.
[0379] A UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2601 to a gNB-CU. The L3 measurement reports 2601 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
[0380] Based on the L3 measurement reports 2601 , the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0381] The gNB-CU may send to a g N B-DU2, a UE context setup request message 2602. The UE context setup request message 2602 may comprise a request for the g N B- DU2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g NB-DU2. The g NB-DU2 may be a candidate target gNB-DU for LTM of the UE. [0382] The g NB-D U2 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context setup response message 2603. The UE context setup response message 2603 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. The lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
[0383] The gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU1, a UE context setup modification message 2604. The UE context modification request message 2604 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells of the g NB-DU2 for the UE. The g N B-DU 1 may be a source g NB-DU for LTM of the UE.
[0384] The g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2605. The UE context modification response message 2605 may comprise RS configuration of the source cell of the UE.
[0385] The gNB-CU may send to the gN B-DU2, a UE context setup modification message 2606. The UE context modification request message 2606 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gN B- D Us for the UE.
[0386] The g NB-D U2 may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2607.
[0387] The gNB-CU may send to the g N B- DU 1 , a DL RRC message transfer message 2608. The DL RRC message transfer message 2608 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0388] The g NB-D U 1 may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2609.
[0389] The UE may send to the gNB-DU1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2610.
[0390] The g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2611. The UL RRC message transfer message 2611 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2610.
[0391] The UE may send to the gNB-DU1 , L1 measurement reports 2612.
[0392] The g NB-D U 1 , based on the L1 measurement reports 2612, may determine to start LTM execution for the UE. [0393] The gNB-DU1 may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2613 (e.g., a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command). The cell switch command 2613 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested.
[0394] The g NB-D U 1 may send to the gNB-CU, an LTM cell change notification message 2614. The LTM cell change notification message 2614 may comprise a target cell identifier in the target gN B-DU2 (the identifier of the cell to which the cell switch of the UE is requested) and/or selected beam information (information of the beam selected for the cell switch in the target cell).
[0395] The gNB-CU may send to the gN B-DU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2615. The LTM cell change notification message 2615 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information.
[0396] The UE, based on the cell switch command 2613, may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch). [0397] The gNB-DU2 may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2616. The access success message 2616 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch). [0398] FIG. 27 illustrates an example of an inter-g N B-CU LTM.
[0399] A UE may send layer 3 (L3) measurement reports 2701 to a gNB-CU 1. The L3 measurement reports 2701 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE. The g NB-CU 1 may be a source gNB-CU for LTM of the UE.
[0400] Based on the L3 measurement reports 2701, the gNB-CU 1 may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0401] The g NB-C U 1 may send to a g NB-CU2, a handover request message 2702. The handover request message 2702 may comprise a request for the g N B-C U2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g N B-CU2. The g N B-C U2 may be a candidate target gNB-CU for LTM of the UE.
[0402] The g NB-C U2 may send to a g NB-DU2, a UE context setup request message 2703. The UE context setup request message 2703 may comprise a request for the g N B- DU2 to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the g NB-DU2. The g NB-DU2 may be a candidate target gNB-DU for LTM of the UE.
[0403] The g N B- D U2 may send to the g N B-C U2, a UE context setup response message 2704. The UE context setup response message 2704 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. The lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration.
[0404] The gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover request acknowledge message 2705. The handover request acknowledge message 2705 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0405] The gNB-CU1 may send to a gNB-DU 1 , a UE context setup modification message 2706. The UE context modification request message 2706 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells of the g NB-DU2 for the UE. The g NB-DU 1 may be a source gNB-DU for LTM of the UE.
[0406] The gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a UE context modification response message 2707. The UE context modification response message 2707 may comprise RS configuration of the source cell of the UE.
[0407] The g NB-C U 1 may send to the g NB-CU2, a handover request message 2708. The handover request message 2708 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gNB-CUs and/or gNB-DUs for the UE.
[0408] The g N B-C U2 may send to the g N B- D U2, a UE context setup modification message 2709. The UE context modification request message 2709 may comprise the lower layer RRC configurations and/or the RS configurations for one or more candidate LTM cells of other candidate target gNB-CUs and/or gNB-DUs for the UE.
[0409] The g NB-D U2 may send to the g NB-CU2, a UE context modification response message 2710. [0410] The gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover request acknowledgement message 2711.
[0411] The gNB-CU1 may send to the gNB-DU 1 , a DL RRC message transfer message 2712. The DL RRC message transfer message 2712 may comprise an RRCReconfiguration message with one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0412] The gNB-DU1 may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2713.
[0413] The UE may send to the gNB-DU1, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2714.
[0414] The gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , an UL RRC message transfer message 2715. The UL RRC message transfer message 2715 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2714.
[0415] The UE may send to the gNB-DU1 , L1 measurement reports 2716.
[0416] The g NB-D U 1 , based on the L1 measurement reports 2716, may determine to start LTM execution for the UE. [0417] The g N B- D U 1 may send to the UE, a cell switch command 2717 (e.g. , a MAC CE comprising the cell switch command). The cell switch command 2717 may comprise an identifier of the candidate LTM cell configuration to which the cell switch is requested.
[0418] The gNB-DU1 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , an LTM cell change notification message 2718. The LTM cell change notification message 2718 may comprise a target cell identifier in the target gNB-DU2 (the identifier of the cell to which the cell switch of the UE is requested) and/or selected beam information (information of the beam selected for the cell switch in the target cell).
[0419] The gNB-CU1 may send to the gNB-CU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2719. The LTM cell change notification message 2719 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information. [0420] The g NB-C U2 may send to the g NB-DU2, an LTM cell change notification message 2720. The LTM cell change notification message 2720 may comprise the target cell identifier and/or the selected beam information. [0421] The UE, based on the cell switch command 2717, may perform LTM execution (e.g., execute the cell switch). [0422] The g N B- D U2 may send to the g N B-C U2, an access success message 2721. The access success message 2721 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch). [0423] The gNB-CU2 may send to the gNB-CU 1 , a handover success message 2722. The handover success message 2722 may comprise the target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
[0424] FIG. 28 illustrates an example of a UE-based intra-gN B-DU LTM (e.g., conditional LTM).
[0425] A UE may perform a UE-based LTM in case of intra-gN B-DU LTM and/or in case of inter-gN B-DU LTM and/or in case of Inter-gNB-CU LTM.
[0426] A UE may send L3 measurement reports 2801 to a gNB-CU. The L3 measurement reports 2801 may comprise measurements of a serving cell and one or more neighbor cells of the UE.
[0427] Based on the L3 measurement reports 2801 , the gNB-CU may determine to configure one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. [0428] The gNB-CU may send to a gNB-DU, a UE context modification request message 2802. The UE context modification request message 2802 may comprise a request for the gNB-DU to prepare resources for the UE in one or more cells of the gNB-DU.
[0429] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, a UE context modification response message 2803. The UE context modification response message 2803 may comprise lower layer RRC configurations and/or reference signal (RS) configurations for the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. The lower layer RRC configurations may comprise a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state configuration and/or a random access channel (RACH) configuration. [0430] The gNB-CU may send to the gNB-DU, a DL RRC message transfer message 2804. The DL RRC message transfer message 2804 may comprise an RRC Reconfiguration message comprising one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE.
[0431] The gNB-DU may send to the UE, the RRCReconfiguration message 2805.
[0432] The UE may send to the gNB-DU, an RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2806.
[0433] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an UL RRC message transfer message 2807. The UL RRC message transfer message 2807 may comprise the RRCReconfigurationComplete message 2806.
[0434] The UE may perform L1 measurements corresponding to the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE (e.g, signal level measurements for the serving cell and/or for the one or more candidate LTM cells).
[0435] The UE, based on the L1 measurements, may determine to perform LTM execution to a cell of the one or more candidate LTM cells.
[0436] The gNB-DU may send to the gNB-CU, an access success message 2808. The access success message 2808 may comprise a target cell identifier (the identifier of the cell to which the UE has executed the cell switch).
[0437] The gNB-CU may send to the UE (via gNB-DU), the RRCReconfiguration message comprising the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE. In an example, the one or more LTM configurations associated with the one or more candidate LTM cells for the UE may correspond to one or more future LTM executions by the UE.
[0438] A BS may determine to start a handover procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE. A BS may determine to start a conditional handover procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE. [0439] An MN may determine to start an SN addition procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE. An MN may determine to start a conditional SN addition procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE. An SN may determine to start an SN change procedure for a UE based on measurement reports from the UE. [0440] A BS may configure a UE to perform and report measurements. The BS may configure the UE to perform and report periodic measurements. The BS may configure the UE to perform and report event triggered measurements.
[0441] The BS may configure one or more events for the UE to perform and report measurements. [0442] When an event configured to the UE by the BS is triggered, the UE may report to the BS, that the event happened. When an event configured to the UE by the BS is triggered, the UE may report to the BS, one or more measurements configured by the BS for the event. For example, if the event is associated with one cell, the UE may report signal measurements for the cell. For example, if the event is associated with two cells, the UE may report signal measurements for the two cells.
[0443] The one or more events may comprise an event A1. The event A1 may comprise an event when a signal metric of a serving cell of the UE minus a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1 (e.g, Ms - Hys > Thresh).
[0444] The signal metric of a cell may comprise a reference signal received power (RS RP) of a reference signal of the cell. The signal metric of the cell may comprise a reference signal received quality (RS RQ) of the reference signal of the cell. The signal metric of the cell may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SIN R) of the reference signal of the cell.
[0445] The reference signal of the cell may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal. The reference signal of the cell may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0446] The one or more events may comprise an event A2. The event A2 may comprise an event when a signal metric of a serving cell plus a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2 (e.g, Ms + Hys < Thresh).
[0447] The one or more events may comprise an event A3. The event A3 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell plus a cell specific offset of the second cell minus a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell cell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell cell plus an offset of the event A3 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off).
[0448] The one or more events may comprise an event A4. The event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh).
[0449] The one or more events may comprise an event A5. The event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell cell plus a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5 (e.g, Mp + Hys < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus by a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5 (e.g, Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2). [0450] The one or more events may comprise an event A6. The event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of an SCell cell plus a cell specific offset of the SCell cell plus an offset of the event A6 (e.g, Mn + Ocn - Hys > Ms + Ocs + Off).
[0451] The one or more events may comprise an event B1. The event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of an inter- RAT neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the I nter-RAT neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the inter- RAT neighbor cell minus a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh).
[0452] The one or more events may comprise an event B2. The event B2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a PCell plus a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2 (e.g., Mp + Hys < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an inter-RAT neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell plus a cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell minus the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh2).
[0453] The one or more events may comprise an event 11. The event 11 may comprise an event when a measurement of an interference minus a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11 (e.g. Mi - Hys > Thresh).
[0454] The one or more events may comprise an event C1. The event C1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio minus a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1 (e.g, Ms - Hys > Thresh).
[0455] The one or more events may comprise an event C2. The event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio plus a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2 (e.g, Ms + Hys < Thresh).
[0456] The one or more events may comprise an event D1. The event D1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a first reference location of the event D1 minus a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1 (e.g, M/1 - Hys > Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a second reference location of the event D1 plus the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1 (e.g, M/2 + Hys < Thresh2).
[0457] The one or more events may comprise an event D2. The event D2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a first moving reference location of the event D2 minus a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2 (e.g, M/1 - Hys > Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the UE and a second moving reference location of the event D2 plus the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2 (e.g . , M/2 + Hys < Thresh?).
[0458] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event T1. The conditional event T 1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a time at the UE is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the UE is less than the threshold of the conditional event T1 plus a duration of the conditional event T1 (e.g., Thresh < Mt< Thresh + Duration).
[0459] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event A3. The conditional event A3 may comprise an event A3 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
[0460] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event A4. The conditional event A4 may comprise an event A4 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
[0461] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event A5. The conditional event A5 may comprise an event A5 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
[0462] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event D1. The conditional event D1 may comprise an event D1 fora conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
[0463] The one or more events may comprise a conditional event D2. The conditional event D2 may comprise an event D2 for a conditional reconfiguration neighbor cell.
[0464] The one or more events may comprise an event X1. The event X1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay UE for the UE plus a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1 (e.g., Mr+ Hys < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell plus a cell specific offset of the NR cell minus the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1 (e.g., Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys > Thresh?).
[0465] The one or more events may comprise an event X2. The event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay UE for the UE plus a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2 (e.g., Mr+ Hys < Thresh).
[0466] The one or more events may comprise an event Y1. The event Y 1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell plus a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1 (Mp + Hys < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1 (Mr- Hys > Thresh?). [0467] The one or more events may comprise an event Y2. The event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2 (Mr- Hys > Thresh).
[0468] The one or more events may comprise an event Z1. The event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device plus a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1 (Mr + Hys < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device minus the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1 (Mn - Hys > Thresh2).
[0469] The one or more events may comprise an event H 1. The event H 1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1 (Ms - Hys > Thresh).
[0470] The one or more events may comprise an event H2. The event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2 (Ms + Hys < Thresh).
[0471] The one or more events may comprise an event A3H1. The event A3H1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell plus an offset of the event A3H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1 (Ms - Hys > Thresh).
[0472] The one or more events may comprise an event A3H2. The event A3H2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell plus a cell specific offset of the SpCell plus an offset of the event A3H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Mp + Ofp + Ocp + Off). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device plus a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2 (Ms + Hys < Thresh).
[0473] The one or more events may comprise an event A4H1. The event A4H1 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1 Ms - Hys2 > Thresh2).
[0474] The one or more events may comprise an event A4H2. The event A4H2 may comprise an event when both a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device plus a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2 (Ms + Hys2 < Thresh2).
[0475] The one or more events may comprise an event A5H1. The event A5H1 may comprise an event when all of a first condition and a second condition and a third condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1 (Mp + Hys1 < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Thresh2). The third condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H1 (Ms- Hys2> Thresh3).
[0476] The one or more events may comprise an event A5H2. The event A5H2 may comprise an event when all of a first condition and a second condition and a third condition are satisfied. The first condition is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a SpCell plus a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2 (Mp + Hys1 < Threshl). The second condition is satisfied when a signal metric of a neighbor cell plus a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell plus a cell specific offset of the neighbor cell minus the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2 (Mn + Ofn + Ocn - Hys1 > Thresh2). The third condition is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device minus a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2 (Ms + Hys2 < Thresh3).
[0477] FIG. 29 illustrates an example of a radio link failure.
[0478] A signal level of a serving cell may experience a degradation with time. For example, a signal metric (e.g, reference signal received power) may become below a threshold (e.g., a threshold below which it is not possible to receive the reference signal of the serving cell and/or a threshold below which it is not possible to have a reliable communication with the serving cell). After such radio link problem is detected (e.g., on a physical layer), a wireless device may start a timer T310. If the timer T310 expires, but the radio link conditions of the serving cell do not improve, a radio link failure (RLF) event happens (e.g, the wireless device declares the RLF event). The RLF event may require the wireless device to stop communication with the serving cell and start a connection reestablishment procedure (e.g, find a new cell and try to connect to the new cell).
[0479] When a wireless device is performing a handover from a first cell (e.g, a serving cell) to a second cell (e.g, a target cell), a handover failure (HOF) may happen.
[0480] For example, an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device. This may refer to, for example, too late handover. This may refer to, for example, HOF.
[0481] For example, an RLF may happen in the second cell during the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell or shortly after the handover. This may refer to, for example, HOF.
[0482] A wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting the measurement events (e.g, A1 event, A2 event, A3 event, etc.). This may allow the wireless device, for example, to reduce measurement efforts (for example, to perform the measurements only when needed to predictions and/or only around the predicted time of the measurement event). This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to prepare for the wireless device mobility in advance (e.g, exchange the handover preparation messages with a neighbor base station in advance). This may allow to reduce probability of RLF and/or HOF.
[0483] The wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting RLF. This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to handover the wireless device to another cell and to avoid the RLF. This may allow to reduce probability of the RLF. [0484] The wireless device may be equipped with a mechanism capable of predicting HOF. This may allow the wireless device to report the predictions to the serving base station. This may allow the serving base station to take action to try to avoid the HOF, e.g, try to find another cell for the handover of the wireless device and/or do not perform the handover.
[0485] The mechanism may be an artificial intelligence (Al) model and/or a machine learning (ML) model and/or an AI/ML model or any other model and/or algorithm and/or mechanism that may determine one or more predictions of one or more output parameters based on one or more input parameters.
[0486] In existing technologies, a wireless device may operate in an environment where there are many small cells. The wireless device may have multiple serving cells (e.g, PCell, PSCell, multiple SCells) and may have multiple neighbor cells (e.g, tens of neighbor cells). Serving cells and neighbor cells may be changing very often due to mobility.
[0487] In existing technologies, the wireless device may be configured to perform predictions on the serving cells and/or on the neighbor cells. The predictions may comprise one or more measurement event predictions (e.g, event A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, etc.). The predictions may comprise one or more RLF predictions in the serving cells. The predictions may comprise one or more HOF predictions of one or more neighbor cells that are candidate cells for the mobility (e.g, handover) of the wireless device.
[0488] In existing technologies, the number of configured predictions may be very large to cover, for example, all the serving cells and all the neighbor cells. Also, due to mobility of the wireless device, there may be multiple predictions for the same cell at different points of time (e.g., 1 second from now, 7 seconds from now, 11 seconds from now).
[0489] In existing technologies, the wireless device may send all the results of the configured predictions to the serving base station. The wireless device may add an additional information to each of the prediction, for example, signal measurements and/or predictions of one or more cells associated with the predicted event. This may require a lot of data transmission from the wireless device to the base station. This may consume a lot of radio resource that otherwise may be used for user data transmission. This may result in degradation of the capacity and/or throughput. [0490] Not all predictions may be useful for the serving base station.
[0491] For example, if the wireless device predicts an RLF and predicts a probability of the RLF as 90%, this may be useful prediction for the serving base station. If the wireless device predicts an RLF and predicts a probability of the RLF as 30%, this may be not very useful prediction for the serving base station.
[0492] For example, if the wireless device predicts an event A3 (neighbor becomes amount of offset better than PCell) between a first (serving) cell and a second (neighbor) cell, the serving base station uses this prediction for the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, and the handover is successful, this may be useful prediction for the serving base station. If the wireless device predicts an event A3 (neighbor becomes amount of offset better than PCell) between a first (serving) cell and a second (neighbor) cell, the serving base station uses this prediction for the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, and a HOF happens during the handover, this may be not useful prediction or even harmful prediction for the serving base station.
[0493] The implementation of the existing technologies may result in unnecessary and/or excessive signaling to transmit all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations, even if not all of the predictions are useful and/or needed at the serving base stations. This may result in a waste of radio resources that otherwise may be used for user data transmission. This may result in degradation of the radio network capacity and/or throughput.
[0494] Embodiments of the present disclosure are related to an approach for solving the problems described above. These and other features of the present disclosure are described further below.
[0495] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold. [0496] Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing the one or more additional conditions for reporting predictions. This may improve the radio network capacity and/or throughput. [0497] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event. [0498] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
[0499] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
[0500] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0501] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an SHO between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell. [0502] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell. [0503] Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing additional conditions for reporting the predictions. The additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF.
[0504] The additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The additional conditions may comprise comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The additional conditions may comprise comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
[0505] This may improve the radio network capacity and/or throughput.
[0506] FIG. 30 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0507] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
[0508] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
[0509] FIG. 31 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0510] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
[0511] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event. [0512] In an example embodiment, the third event may comprise one or more measurement events. The third event may comprise one or more unintended events. The third event may comprise one or more intended events. The third event may comprise one or more time events.
[0513] In an example embodiment, the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A6.
[0514] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event B1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event B2.
[0515] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event 11.
[0516] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event C1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event C2.
[0517] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event D1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event D2.
[0518] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event T 1.
[0519] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A3. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A4. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A5.
[0520] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D1. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D2.
[0521] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event X1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event X2.
[0522] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y2.
[0523] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Z1.
[0524] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event H2.
[0525] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H2.
[0526] In an example embodiment, the event A1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1. [0527] In an example embodiment, the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP). The signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ). The signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
[0528] In an example embodiment, the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal. The reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0529] The hysteresis of the event A1 may refer to a hysteresis parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A1.
[0530] The threshold of the event A1 may refer to an a1 -Threshold parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A1.
[0531] The signal metric of the first cell (e.g, serving cell of the wireless device) may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The hysteresis of the event A1 may be expressed in dB. The threshold of the event A1 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell.
[0532] In an example embodiment, the event A2 may comprises an event when a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
[0533] The hysteresis of the event A2 may refer to a hysteresis parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A2.
[0534] The threshold of the event A2 may refer to an a2-Threshold parameter in the reportConfig NR information element for the event A2.
[0535] The signal metric of the first cell (e.g., serving cell of the wireless device) may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The hysteresis of the event A2 may be expressed in dB. The threshold of the event A2 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell.
[0536] In an example embodiment, the event A3 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
[0537] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the second cell).
[0538] The cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfig NR information element). [0539] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the SpCell (e.g, offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the first cell).
[0540] The cell specific offset of the first cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the SpCell cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell).
[0541] The hysteresis of the event A3 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A3 (e.g., hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A3).
[0542] The offset of the event A3 may refer to the offset parameter for the event A3 (e.g., a3-Offset parameter in reportConfigN R information element for the event A3).
[0543] The signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
[0544] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB. The cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
[0545] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell may be expressed in dB. The cell specific offset of the first cell may be expressed in dB.
[0546] The hysteresis of the event A2 may be expressed in dB. The offset of the event A3 may be expressed in dB. [0547] In an example embodiment, the event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
[0548] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell).
[0549] The cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., cell I ndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigN R information element).
[0550] The hysteresis of the event A4 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A4 (e.g., hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR for the event A4).
[0551] The threshold of the event A4 may refer to the threshold parameter for the event A4 (e.g, a4-Threshold parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A4).
[0552] The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
[0553] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB. [0554] The cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
[0555] The hysteresis of the event A4 may be expressed in dB.
[0556] The threshold of the event A4 may be expressed in in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell. [0557] In an example embodiment, the event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event A5 and the second condition of the event A5 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5. The second condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
[0558] The hysteresis of the event A5 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A5 (e.g, hysteresis as defined within reportConfigN R for this event).
[0559] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g., offsetMO parameter in measObjectN R information element corresponding to the second cell).
[0560] The cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigN information element).
[0561] The first threshold of the event A5 may refer to the first threshold parameter for the event A5 (e.g, a5- Thresholdl parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A5).
[0562] The second threshold of the event A5 may refer to the second threshold parameter for the event A5 (e.g, a5- Threshold2 parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A5).
[0563] The signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
[0564] The hysteresis of the event A5 may be expressed in dB.
[0565] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
[0566] The cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
[0567] The first threshold of the event A5 may be expressed in in the same unit as the signal metric of the first cell. The second threshold of the event A5 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell.
[0568] In an example embodiment, the event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6. [0569] The cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the neighbor cell (e.g , celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element).
[0570] The hysteresis of the event A6 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event A6 (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for the event A6).
[0571] The cell specific offset of the first cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the serving cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectNR information element and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfigNR information element).
[0572] The offset of the event A6 may refer to the offset parameter for the event A6 (e.g, a6-Offset parameter in reportConfigNR information element for the event A6).
[0573] The signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
[0574] The cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB. The hysteresis of the event A6 may be expressed in dB. The cell specific offset of the first cell may be expressed in dB. The offset of the event A6 may be expressed in dB.
[0575] In an example embodiment, the event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
[0576] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell).
[0577] The cell specific offset of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element).
[0578] The hysteresis of the event B1 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event B1 (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information elementfor the event B1).
[0579] The threshold of the event B1 may refer to the threshold parameter for the event B1 (e.g, b1 - ThresholdEUTRA parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1 and/or b1 -ThresholdUTRA- FDD parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B1).
[0580] The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. [0581] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB. The cell specific offset of the second cell may be expressed in dB. The hysteresis of the event B1 may be expressed in dB. The threshold of the event B1 may be expressed in the same unit as the signal metric of the second cell.
[0582] In an example embodiment, the event B2 may comprise an event when both of a first condition of the event B2 and a second condition of the event B2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2. The second condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
[0583] The hysteresis of the event B2 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for the event B2 (e.g. , hysteresis parameter in reportConfigl nterRAT information elementfor the event B2).
[0584] The first threshold of the event B2 may refer to the first threshold parameter for the event B2 (e.g., b2- Thresholdl parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information elementfor the event B2).
[0585] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the measurement object specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, eutra-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell and/or utra- FDD-Q-OffsetRange parameter in measObjectUTRA-FDD information element corresponding to the frequency of the second cell).
[0586] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may refer to the cell specific offset of the inter-RAT neighbor cell (e.g, celllndividualOffset parameter in measObjectEUTRA information element corresponding to the second cell and/or celllndividualOffset parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element. [0587] The second threshold of the event B2 may refer to the second threshold parameter for the event B2 (e.g, b2- Threshold2 EUTRA parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B2 and/or b2- Threshold2 UT A-FD D parameter in reportConfiglnterRAT information element for the event B2).
[0588] The signal metric of the first cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR. The signal metric of the second cell may be expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ and SINR.
[0589] The hysteresis of the event B2 may be expressed in dB.
[0590] The first threshold of the event B2 may be expressed in the same units as the signal metric of the first cell. [0591] The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB. The measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell may be expressed in dB.
[0592] The second threshold of the event B2 may be expressed in the same units as the signal metric of the second cell. [0593] In an example embodiment, the event 11 comprises an event when a measurement of an interference decreased by a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11.
[0594] The hysteresis of the event 11 may refer to the hysteresis parameter for this event (e.g, hysteresis parameter in reportConfig NR information element for this event).
[0595] The threshold of the event 11 may refer to the threshold parameter for this event (e.g., i1 -Threshold parameter in reportConfig NR information element for this event).
[0596] The interference may be expressed in dBm. The hysteresis of the event 11 may be expressed in dB. The threshold of the event 11 may be expressed in dBm.
[0597] In an example embodiment, the event C1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio decreased by a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1.
[0598] In an example embodiment, the event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
[0599] In an example embodiment, the event D1 may comprises an event when both of the first condition of the event D1 and the second condition of the event D1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1. The second condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
[0600] In an example embodiment, the event D2 may comprise an event when both of the first condition of the event D2 and the second condition of the event D2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2. The second condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2.
[0601] In an example embodiment, the conditional event T1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
[0602] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A3 may comprise the event A3.
[0603] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A4 may comprise the event A4.
[0604] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A5 may comprise the event A5.
[0605] In an example embodiment, the conditional event D1 may comprise the event D1.
[0606] In an example embodiment, the conditional event D2 may comprise the event D2. [0607] In an example embodiment, the event X1 may comprise an event when both the first condition of the event X1 and the second condition of the event X1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1. The second condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
[0608] In an example embodiment, the event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
[0609] In an example embodiment, the event Y1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Y1 and a second condition of the event Y1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1. The second condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1.
[0610] In an example embodiment, the event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
[0611] In an example embodiment, the event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Z1 and a second condition of the event Z1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1. The second condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
[0612] In an example embodiment, the event H1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1.
[0613] In an example embodiment, the event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
[0614] In an example embodiment, the event A3H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H1 and a second condition of the event A3H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1. The second condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
[0615] In an example embodiment, the event A3H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H2 and a second condition of the event A3H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2. The second condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
[0616] In an example embodiment, the event A4H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H1 and a second condition of the event A4H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1. The second condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
[0617] In an example embodiment, the event A4H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H2 and a second condition of the event A4H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2. The second condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
[0618] In an example embodiment, the event A5H1 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H1 and a second condition of the event A5H1 and a third condition of the event A5H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1. The second condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1. The third condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H 1.
[0619] In an example embodiment, the event A5H2 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H2 and a second condition of the event A5H2 and a third condition of the event A5H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2. The second condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2. The third condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
[0620] In an example embodiment, the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a first cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0621] The one or more unintended events may comprise a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0622] A radio link failure (RLF) event may refer to an event when the wireless device loses connection with the first cell and/or the second cell. The first cell and/or the second cell may be serving cells of the wireless device. For example, the first cell may be serving cell of the wireless device. The first cell may be serving cell of the wireless device before handover to the second cell. The second may be serving cell of the wireless device after handover from the first cell.
[0623] A signal level of the serving cell may experience a degradation with time. For example, a signal metric (e.g. , RSRP and/or RSRQ and/or SINR) may become below a threshold. The threshold may correspond to a threshold below which it is not possible to receive the reference signal of the serving cell and/or a threshold below which it is not possible to have a reliable communication with the serving cell. After such radio link problem is detected (e.g., on a physical layer), the wireless device may start a timer T310.
[0624] If the timer T310 expires, but the radio link conditions of the serving cell do not improve, an RLF event happens (e.g, the wireless device declares the RLF event). The RLF event may require the wireless device to stop communication with the serving cell and start a connection reestablishment procedure (e.g, find a new cell and try to connect to the new cell).
[0625] When a wireless device is performing a handover from a first cell (e.g, a serving cell) to a second cell (e.g, a target cell), a handover failure (HOF) may happen. [0626] For example, an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device. This may refer to HOF.
[0627] For example, an RLF may happen in the second cell during the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell or shortly after the handover. This may refer to HOF.
[0628] For example, an RLF may happen in the first cell before the base station of the first cell prepares the handover and/or before the base station of the first cell sends an RRC reconfiguration message to the wireless device. This may refer to too late handover.
[0629] For example, shortly after the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, the wireless device may undergo handover back to the first cell. This may refer to too early handover.
[0630] For example, shortly after the handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell, the wireless device may experience handover to a cell other than the first cell. This may refer to handover to a wrong cell.
[0631] The one or more unintended events may refer to one or more failure events.
[0632] In an example embodiment, the one or more intended events may comprise a successful handover (SHO) event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0633] The SHO event may refer to an event when a handover of the wireless device from the first cell to the second cell is successful.
[0634] The one or more intended events may refer to one or more successful events.
[0635] In an example embodiment, the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
[0636] In an example embodiment, the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode. The wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode. The wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
[0637] In an example embodiment, the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode. The wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode. The wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
[0638] In an example embodiment, the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
[0639] In an example embodiment, the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events. [0640] In an example embodiment, the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a measurement event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an unintended event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an intended event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a time event.
[0641] In an example embodiment, the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted start time of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted end time of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted duration of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
[0642] For example, the predicted time of a second event may comprise a predicted duration of the wireless device staying the first cell and/or the second cell. The predicted time of a second event may comprise a predicted time of stay of the wireless device in the first cell and/or in the second cell.
[0643] In an example embodiment, the second event threshold may comprise a point in time. The second event threshold may comprise a time interval. The second event threshold may comprise a ToS threshold.
[0644] In an example embodiment, the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
[0645] In an example embodiment, the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
[0646] FIG. 32 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0647] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
[0648] The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
[0649] The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
[0650] For example, the measurement event may comprise an event A3 (e.g, the second cell becomes offset better than the first cell) or another handover related measurement event.
[0651] For example, the one or more conditions may comprise, for example, comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to the ToS threshold. For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the measurement event A3 if the predicted ToS in the second cell is greater than the ToS threshold (e.g, 5 seconds or 10 seconds).
[0652] For example, the one or more conditions may comprise, for example, comparing the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to the threshold probability of the SHO. For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the measurement event A3 if the probability of the SHO is greater than the threshold probability of the SHO (e.g, 90% or 95%).
[0653] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
[0654] The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
[0655] The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the measurement event.
[0656] FIG. 33 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0657] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
[0658] For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell if the prediction of the probability of the RLF is greater than the threshold probability of the RLF (e.g. , 50% or 75%).
[0659] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell. [0660] FIG. 34 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0661] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
[0662] For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the RLF is greater than the threshold probability of the RLF (e.g., 80% or 90%).
[0663] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
[0664] FIG. 35 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0665] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0666] For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the HOF is greater than the threshold probability of the HOF (e.g., 50% or 60%). [0667] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0668] FIG. 36 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0669] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
[0670] For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell if the prediction of the probability of the SHO is greater than the threshold probability of the SHO (e.g, 90% or 95%).
[0671] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
[0672] FIG. 37 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0673] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell. [0674] For example, the wireless device may send to the base station the prediction of the ToS in the second cell if the prediction of the ToS is greater than the threshold ToS (e.g., 10 seconds or 20 seconds).
[0675] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
[0676] In an example embodiment, the first cell may comprise a serving cell of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
[0677] In an example embodiment, the second cell may comprise a neighbor of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
[0678] In an example embodiment, the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the third event. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
[0679] In an example embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0680] In an example embodiment, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0681] In an example embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0682] The one or more measurement object parameters may comprise, for example, SSB frequency parameters and/or SSB subcarrier spacing parameters reference signal configuration parameters etc. [0683] The one or more reporting configuration parameters may comprise, for example, parameters indicating to perform periodic and/or event triggered measurements and/or configuration parameters of the measurement events (e.g, events A1,A2, A3 etc.).
[0684] The configuration parameters of one or more predicted times may comprise, for example, minimum duration and/or ToS and/or maximum duration and/or ToS etc.
[0685] The configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event may comprise, for example, a time interval during which the wireless device may perform the prediction (e.g., between 10 seconds and 20 seconds from now). [0686] In an example embodiment, the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a type of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction the third event will happen. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a probability of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted time of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. [0687] The prediction of the third event may comprise one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
[0688] The prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the measurement event (e.g., event A1 , A2, A3 etc.). The prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the unintended event (e.g, RLF event and/or HOF event). The prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the intended event (e.g, SHO). The prediction of the type of the third event may comprise, for example, an indication that the event is the time (e.g, staying in the first cell and/or the second cell).
[0689] The one or more cells associated with the third event may comprise, for example, the first cell and/or the second cell.
[0690] The cell associated with the third event may comprise, for example, the second cell.
[0691] In an example embodiment, the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted start time of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
[0692] In an example embodiment, the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event. [0693] In an example embodiment, the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP). The signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ). The signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
[0694] In an example embodiment, the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal. The reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS). [0695] In an example embodiment, the handover may comprise a handover. The handover may comprise a conditional handover. The handover may comprise a dual connectivity reconfiguration. The handover may comprise a multiple connectivity reconfiguration. The handover may comprise a cell switch. The handover may comprise a cell change. The handover may comprise a layer 11 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM). The handover may comprise a conditional LTM.
[0696] In an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
[0697] In an example embodiment, the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC messages. The one or more first messages may comprise an RRC reconfiguration message. The one or more first messages may comprise an RRC resume message. The one or more first messages may comprise a prediction configuration message.
[0698] The one or more first messages may comprise, for example, a radio bearer configuration (e.g, radio BearerConfig parameter). The one or more first messages may comprise a measurement configuration (e.g., measConfig parameter). The one or more first messages may comprise a conditional reconfiguration (e.g., conditionalReconfiguration-r16).
[0699] In an example embodiment, the wireless device may send to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
[0700] In an example embodiment, the one or more second messages may comprise an RRC messages. The one or more second messages may comprise a measurement report message. The one or more second messages may comprise a prediction report message.
[0701] The one or more second messages may comprise, for example, measurement results (e.g., measResults parameter). The measurement results may comprise measurement results for serving cells (e.g, measResu ItServing MOList parameter). The measurement results may comprise measurement results for neighbor cells (e.g, measResultNeighCells parameter).
[0702] FIG. 38 illustrates an example as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0703] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event
[0704] Example embodiments of the present disclosure may solve the problems of unnecessary and/or excessive signaling for transmitting all the predictions from wireless devices to their serving base stations by introducing the one or more additional conditions for reporting predictions. This may improve the radio network capacity and/or throughput. [0705] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
[0706] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold.
[0707] In an example embodiment, the wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
[0708] In an example embodiment, the base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
[0709] In an example embodiment, the third event may comprise one or more measurement events. The third event may comprise one or more unintended events. The third event may comprise one or more intended events. The third event may comprise one or more time events.
[0710] In an example embodiment, the one or more measurement events may comprise an event A1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A6.
[0711] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event B1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event B2.
[0712] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event 11.
[0713] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event C1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event C2.
[0714] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event D1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event D2.
[0715] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event T 1. [0716] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A3. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A4. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event A5.
[0717] The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D1. The one or more measurement events may comprise a conditional event D2.
[0718] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event X1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event X2.
[0719] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Y2.
[0720] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event Z1.
[0721] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event H2.
[0722] The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A3H2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A4H2. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H1. The one or more measurement events may comprise an event A5H2.
[0723] In an example embodiment, the event A1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1.
[0724] In an example embodiment, the event A2 may comprises an event when a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
[0725] In an example embodiment, the event A3 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
[0726] In an example embodiment, the event A4 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
[0727] In an example embodiment, the event A5 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event A5 and the second condition of the event A5 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5. The second condition of the event A5 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
[0728] In an example embodiment, the event A6 may comprises an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6.
[0729] In an example embodiment, the event B1 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
[0730] In an example embodiment, the event B2 may comprise an event when both of a first condition of the event B2 and a second condition of the event B2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2. The second condition of the event B2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
[0731] In an example embodiment, the event 11 comprises an event when a measurement of an interference decreased by a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11.
[0732] In an example embodiment, the event C1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio decreased by a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1.
[0733] In an example embodiment, the event C2 comprises an event when a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
[0734] In an example embodiment, the event D1 may comprises an event when both of the first condition of the event D1 and the second condition of the event D1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1. The second condition of the event D1 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
[0735] In an example embodiment, the event D2 may comprise an event when both of the first condition of the event D2 and the second condition of the event D2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2. The second condition of the event D2 is satisfied when a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2.
[0736] In an example embodiment, the conditional event T 1 may comprises an event when a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
[0737] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A3 may comprise the event A3.
[0738] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A4 may comprise the event A4.
[0739] In an example embodiment, the conditional event A5 may comprise the event A5.
[0740] In an example embodiment, the conditional event D1 may comprise the event D1.
[0741] In an example embodiment, the conditional event D2 may comprise the event D2.
[0742] In an example embodiment, the event X1 may comprise an event when both the first condition of the event X1 and the second condition of the event X1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1. The second condition of the event X1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
[0743] In an example embodiment, the event X2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
[0744] In an example embodiment, the event Y1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Y1 and a second condition of the event Y1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1. The second condition of the event Y1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1.
[0745] In an example embodiment, the event Y2 may comprise an event when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
[0746] In an example embodiment, the event Z1 may comprise an event when both a first condition of the event Z1 and a second condition of the event Z1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1. The second condition of the event Z1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
[0747] In an example embodiment, the event H1 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1.
[0748] In an example embodiment, the event H2 may comprise an event when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
[0749] In an example embodiment, the event A3H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H1 and a second condition of the event A3H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1. The second condition of the event A3H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
[0750] In an example embodiment, the event A3H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A3H2 and a second condition of the event A3H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2. The second condition of the event A3H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
[0751] In an example embodiment, the event A4H1 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H1 and a second condition of the event A4H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1. The second condition of the event A4H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
[0752] In an example embodiment, the event A4H2 comprises an event when both a first condition of the event A4H2 and a second condition of the event A4H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2. The second condition of the event A4H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
[0753] In an example embodiment, the event A5H1 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H1 and a second condition of the event A5H1 and a third condition of the event A5H1 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1. The second condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1. The third condition of the event A5H1 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H 1.
[0754] In an example embodiment, the event A5H2 comprises an event when all of a first condition of the event A5H2 and a second condition of the event A5H2 and a third condition of the event A5H2 are satisfied. The first condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2. The second condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2. The third condition of the event A5H2 is satisfied when a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
[0755] In an example embodiment, the one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a first cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a radio link failure event in a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0756] The one or more unintended events may comprise a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more unintended events may comprise a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0757] In an example embodiment, the one or more intended events may comprise a successful handover (SHO) event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0758] In an example embodiment, the one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell. The one or more time events may comprise an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
[0759] In an example embodiment, the wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode. The wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode. The wireless device staying in the first cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
[0760] In an example embodiment, the wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode. The wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode. The wireless device staying in the second cell may comprise the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
[0761] In an example embodiment, the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
[0762] In an example embodiment, the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
[0763] In an example embodiment, the first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a measurement event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an unintended event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of an intended event. The first event threshold may comprise a threshold probability of a time event.
[0764] In an example embodiment, the predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted start time of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted end time of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted duration of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event. The predicted time of the second event may comprise a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
[0765] In an example embodiment, the second event threshold may comprise a point in time. The second event threshold may comprise a time interval. The second event threshold may comprise a ToS threshold.
[0766] In an example embodiment, the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold. The comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold. [0767] In an example embodiment, the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold. The comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold may comprise determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
[0768] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
[0769] The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
[0770] The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
[0771] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event.
[0772] The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO.
[0773] The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the measurement event.
[0774] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
[0775] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
[0776] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
[0777] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
[0778] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0779] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0780] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell. [0781] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a SHO between a first cell and a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
[0782] In an example embodiment, a wireless device may receive from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The wireless device may send to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell. [0783] In an example embodiment, a base station may send to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell. The one or more conditions may be based on comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS. The base station may receive from the wireless device, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
[0784] In an example embodiment, the first cell may comprise a serving cell of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device. The first cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
[0785] In an example embodiment, the second cell may comprise a neighbor of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device. The second cell may comprise a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
[0786] In an example embodiment, the configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the third event. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events. The configuration parameters may comprise one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
[0787] In an example embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the third event may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations. [0788] In an example embodiment, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0789] In an example embodiment, the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement object parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more reporting configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events may comprise one or more measurement identities. A measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities may associate one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0790] In an example embodiment, the prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a type of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction the third event will happen. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of a probability of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted time of the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. [0791] The prediction of the third event may comprise one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event. The prediction of the third event may comprise a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
[0792] In an example embodiment, the predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted start time of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted time of the third event may comprise a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
[0793] In an example embodiment, the predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event. The predicted duration of the third event may comprise a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event. [0794] In an example embodiment, the signal metric may comprise a reference signal received power (RSRP). The signal metric may comprise a reference signal received quality (RSRQ). The signal metric may comprise a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal. [0795] In an example embodiment, the reference signal may comprise a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal. The reference signal may comprise a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS). [0796] In an example embodiment, the handover may comprise a handover. The handover may comprise a conditional handover. The handover may comprise a dual connectivity reconfiguration. The handover may comprise a multiple connectivity reconfiguration. The handover may comprise a cell switch. The handover may comprise a cell change. The handover may comprise a layer 11 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM). The handover may comprise a conditional LTM.
[0797] In an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
[0798] In an example embodiment, the one or more first messages may comprise an RRC messages. The one or more first messages may comprise an RRC reconfiguration message. The one or more first messages may comprise an RRC resume message. The one or more first messages may comprise a prediction configuration message.
[0799] In an example embodiment, the wireless device may send to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
[0800] In an example embodiment, the one or more second messages may comprise an RRC messages. The one or more second messages may comprise a measurement report message. The one or more second messages may comprise a prediction report message.
[0801] Clause 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
[0802] Clause 2. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
[0803] Clause 3. The method of clause 2, further comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
[0804] Clause 4. A method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold; and receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event. [0805] Clause 5. A method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold.
[0806] Clause 6. The method of clause 5, further comprising receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
[0807] Clause 7. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the third event comprises: one or more measurement events; one or more unintended events; one or more intended events; and/or one or more time events.
[0808] Clause 8. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more measurement events comprises: an event A1; an event A2; an event A3; an event A4; an event A5; an event A6; an event B1; an event B2; an event 11; an event C1 ; an event C2; an event D1 ; an event D2; a conditional event T1 ; a conditional event A3; a conditional event A4; a conditional event A5; a conditional event D1; a conditional event D2; an event X1; an event X2; an event Y1; an event Y2; an event Z1; an event H1; an event H2; an event A3H1; an event A3H2; an event A4H1; an event A4H2; an event A5H1 ; and/or an event A5H2.
[0809] Clause 9. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell decreased by a hysteresis of the event A1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A1.
[0810] Clause 10. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A2 comprises an event when: a measurement of signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A2.
[0811] Clause 11. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A3 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A3 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3.
[0812] Clause 12. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A4 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A4 becomes more than a threshold of the event A4.
[0813] Clause 13. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A5 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event A5 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5; and a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event A5 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5.
[0814] Clause 14. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A6 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event A6 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A6.
[0815] Clause 15. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event B1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a hysteresis of the event B1 becomes more than a threshold of the event B1.
[0816] Clause 16. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event B2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event B2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event B2; and a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event B2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event B2.
[0817] Clause 17. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event 11 comprises an event when: a measurement of an interference decreased by a hysteresis of the event 11 becomes more than a threshold of the event 11.
[0818] Clause 18. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event C1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio decreased by a hysteresis of the event C1 becomes more than a threshold of the event C1.
[0819] Clause 19. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event C2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a sidelink channel busy ratio increased by a hysteresis of the event C2 becomes less than a threshold of the event C2.
[0820] Clause 20. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event D1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first reference location of the event D1 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D1 ; and a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second reference location of the event D1 increased by the hysteresis of the event D1 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D1.
[0821] Clause 21. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event D2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a first moving reference location of the event D2 decreased by a hysteresis of the event D2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event D2; and a measurement of a distance between the wireless device and a second moving reference location of the event D2 increased by the hysteresis of the event D2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event D2. [0822] Clause 22. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event T 1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a time at the wireless device is more than a threshold of the conditional event T 1 and the measurement of the time at the wireless device is less than the threshold of the conditional event T 1 increased by a duration of the conditional event T1.
[0823] Clause 23. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event A3 comprises the event A3.
[0824] Clause 24. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event A4 comprises the event A4.
[0825] Clause 25. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event A5 comprises the event A5.
[0826] Clause 26. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event D1 comprises the event D1.
[0827] Clause 27. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the conditional event D2 comprises the event D2.
[0828] Clause 28. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event X1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event X1 ; and a measurement of a signal metric of an NR cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the NR cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the NR cell and decreased by the hysteresis of the event X1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event X1.
[0829] Clause 29. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event X2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event X2 becomes less than a threshold of the event X2.
[0830] Clause 30. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event Y1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Y1; and a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Y1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Y1. [0831] Clause 31. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event Y2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event Y2 becomes more than a threshold of the event Y2.
[0832] Clause 32. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event Z1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a serving L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event Z1 ; and a measurement of a signal metric of a candidate L2 U2N relay wireless device for the wireless device decreased by the hysteresis of the event Z1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event Z1.
[0833] Clause 33. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a hysteresis of the event H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event H1. [0834] Clause 34. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a hysteresis of the event H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event H2.
[0835] Clause 35. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A3H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H1 ; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H1 becomes more than a threshold of the event A3H1.
[0836] Clause 36. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A3H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes more than a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the first cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the first cell and increased an offset of the event A3H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A3H2 becomes less than a threshold of the event A3H2.
[0837] Clause 37. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A4H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H1 ; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A4H1.
[0838] Clause 38. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A4H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a second cell increased by a measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by a first hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes more than a first threshold of the event A4H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device increased by a second hysteresis of the event A4H2 becomes less than a second threshold of the event A4H2.
[0839] Clause 39. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A5H1 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H1 ; and a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H1; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H1 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H1.
[0840] Clause 40. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the event A5H2 comprises an event when: a measurement of a signal metric of a first cell increased by a first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes less than a first threshold of the event A5H2; and a signal metric of a second cell increased by measurement object specific offset of the reference signal of the second cell and increased by a cell specific offset of the second cell and decreased by the first hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a second threshold of the event A5H2; and a measurement of an aerial altitude of the wireless device decreased by a second hysteresis of the event A5H2 becomes more than a third threshold of the event A5H2.
[0841] Clause 41. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more unintended events comprises: a radio link failure event in a first cell; a radio link failure event in a second cell; a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell; a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell; a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell; and/or a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell. [0842] Clause 42. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more intended events comprises: a successful handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
[0843] Clause 43. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more time events comprises: an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell; an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell; an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell; and/or an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
[0844] Clause 44. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the wireless device staying in the first cell comprises: the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode; and/or the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
[0845] Clause 45. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the wireless device staying in the second cell comprises: the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode; and/or the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
[0846] Clause 46. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
[0847] Clause 47. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
[0848] Clause 48. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the first event threshold comprises: a threshold probability of a measurement event; a threshold probability of an unintended event; a threshold probability of an intended event; and/or a threshold probability of a time event.
[0849] Clause 49. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the predicted time of the second event comprises: a predicted start time of the second event; a predicted end time of the second event; a predicted duration of the second event; a predicted time of a second event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the second event; and/or a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
[0850] Clause 50. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the second event threshold comprises: a point in time; a time interval; a ToS threshold.
[0851] Clause 51. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold comprises: determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold; and/or determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
[0852] Clause 52. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold comprises: determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold; and/or determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
[0853] Clause 53. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold; comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; or comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
[0854] Clause 54. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
[0855] Clause 55. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell. [0856] Clause 56. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
[0857] Clause 57. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an SHO between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
[0858] Clause 58. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
[0859] Clause 59. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the first cell comprises: a serving cell of the wireless device; a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device; a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device; a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device; and/or a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
[0860] Clause 60. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the second cell comprises: a neighbor of the wireless device; a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device; an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device; and/or a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
[0861] Clause 61. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the configuration parameters comprise: one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events; one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events; one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events; one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events; and/or one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
[0862] Clause 62. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the third event comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations. [0863] Clause 63. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0864] Clause 64. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events comprises: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; and/or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
[0865] Clause 65. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the prediction of the third event comprises: a prediction of a type of the third event; a prediction the third event will happen; a prediction of a probability of the third event; a predicted time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; one or more predictions of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event; one or more measurements of signal metrics of one or more cells associated with the third event; and/or a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
[0866] Clause 66. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the predicted time of the third event comprises: a predicted start time of the third event; a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted time of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
[0867] Clause 67. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the predicted duration of the third event comprises: a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of a third event determined based on a predicted start time and/or a predicted end time and/or a predicted duration of the third event.
[0868] Clause 68. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the signal metric comprises: a reference signal received power (RSRP); a reference signal received quality (RS RQ); and/or a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
[0869] Clause 69. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the reference signal comprises: a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal; and/or a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
[0870] Clause 70. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the handover comprises: a handover; a conditional handover; a dual connectivity reconfiguration; a multiple connectivity reconfiguration; a cell switch; a cell change; a layer 1 1 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM); a conditional LTM.
[0871] Clause 71. The method of any preceding clause, comprising receiving, by the wireless device from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters. [0872] Clause 72. The method of any preceding clause, comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
[0873] Clause 73. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more first messages comprises: an RRC message; an RRC reconfiguration message; an RRC resume message; and/or a prediction configuration message. [0874] Clause 74. The method of any preceding clause, wherein the one or more second messages comprises: an RRC message; a measurement report message; and/or a prediction report message.
[0875] Clause 75. An apparatus comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of clauses 1 to 74. [0876] Clause 76. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of clauses 1 to 74.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
2. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first event threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second event threshold.
3. The method of claim 2, further comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the third event.
4. A method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold; and receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
5. A method comprising: sending, by a base station to a wireless device, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a third event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of a first event to a first threshold; or comparing a predicted time of a second event to a second threshold.
6. The method of claim 5, further comprising receiving, by the base station from the wireless device, the prediction of the third event.
7. The method of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the third event comprises at least one of: one or more measurement events; one or more unintended events; one or more intended events; or one or more time events.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the one or more unintended events comprises at least one of: a radio link failure event in a first cell; a radio link failure event in a second cell; a handover failure event between a first cell and a second cell; a too late handover event between a first cell and a second cell; a too early handover event between a first cell and a second cell; or a handover to a wrong cell event between a first cell and a second cell.
9. The method of any one of claims 7 to 8, wherein the one or more intended events comprises: a successful handover event between a first cell and a second cell.
10. The method of any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the one or more time events comprises at least one of: an event of the wireless device being served by a first cell; an event of the wireless device being served by a second cell; an event of the wireless device staying in a first cell; or an event of the wireless device staying in a second cell.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the wireless device staying in the first cell comprises at least one of: the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC inactive mode; or the wireless device staying in the first cell in RRC idle mode.
12. The method of any one of claims 10 to 11, wherein the wireless device staying in the second cell comprises at least one of: the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC connected mode; the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC inactive mode; or the wireless device staying in the second cell in RRC idle mode.
13. The method of any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the one or more first events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
14. The method of any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the one or more second events comprise one or more of the one or more third events.
15. The method of any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the first event threshold comprises at least one of: a threshold probability of a measurement event; a threshold probability of an unintended event; a threshold probability of an intended event; or a threshold probability of a time event.
16. The method of any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein the predicted time of the second event comprises at least one of: a predicted start time of the second event; a predicted end time of the second event; a predicted duration of the second event; a predicted time of a second event determined based on at least one of a predicted start time, a predicted end time, or a predicted duration of the second event; or a predicted time of stay (ToS) in a cell.
17. The method of any one of claims 1 to 16, wherein the second event threshold comprises: a point in time; a time interval; a ToS threshold.
18. The method of any one of claims 1 to 17, wherein the comparing the probability of the first event to the first event threshold comprises at least one of: determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is less than or equal to the first event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than the first event threshold; or determining by the wireless device whether the probability of the first event is more than or equal to the first event threshold.
19. The method of any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein the comparing the predicted time of the second event to the second event threshold comprises at least one of: determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is less than or equal to the second event threshold; determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than the second event threshold; or determining by the wireless device whether the predicted time of the second event is more than or equal to the second event threshold.
20. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a measurement event, wherein the one or more conditions are based on at least one of: comparing a probability of an RLF in a first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a probability of an RLF in a second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; comparing a predicted ToS in the second cell to a ToS threshold; comparing a probability of an HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; or comparing a probability of an SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the measurement event.
21. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a first cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell to a first threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the first cell.
22. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of a RLF in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell to a second threshold probability of the RLF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the RLF in the second cell.
23. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an HOF between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the HOF; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the HOF between the first cell and the second cell.
24. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a probability of an SHO between a first cell and a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell to a threshold probability of the SHO; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the probability of the SHO between the first cell and the second cell.
25. A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device from a base station, configuration parameters indicating one or more conditions to report a prediction of a ToS in a second cell, wherein the one or more conditions are based on: comparing the predicted ToS in the second cell to a threshold ToS; and sending, by the wireless device to the base station and based on the one or more conditions being satisfied, the prediction of the predicted ToS in the second cell.
26. The method of any one of claims 8 to 21 or 23 to 24, wherein the first cell comprises at least one of: a serving cell of the wireless device; a primary cell (PCell) of the wireless device; a primary secondary cell (PSCell) of the wireless device; a special cell (SpCell) of the wireless device; or a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device.
27. The method of any one of claims 8 to 26, wherein the second cell comprises at least one of: a neighbor of the wireless device; a secondary cell (SCell) of the wireless device; an inter radio access technology (inter-RAT) neighbor cell of the wireless device; or a conditional reconfiguration candidate cell of the wireless device.
28. The method of any one of claims 1 to 27, wherein the configuration parameters comprise at least one of: one or more configuration parameters of the prediction of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of the third event; one or more configuration parameters of one or more first events; one or more first event thresholds corresponding to the one or more first events; one or more configuration parameters of one or more predicted times of one or more second events; one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events; or one or more second event thresholds corresponding to the one or more second events.
29. The method of any one of claims 1 to 28, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the third event comprises at least one of: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
30. The method of any one of claims 1 to 29, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more first events comprises at least one of: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
31. The method of any one of claims 1 to 30, wherein the one or more configuration parameters of the one or more second events comprises at least one of: one or more measurement object parameters; one or more reporting configuration parameters; or one or more measurement identities, wherein a measurement identity of the one or more measurement identities associates one or more of the one or more measurement objects with one or more of the one or more reporting configurations.
32. The method of any one of claims 1 to 31 , wherein the prediction of the third event comprises at least one of: a prediction of a type of the third event; a prediction the third event will happen; a prediction of a probability of the third event; a predicted time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; one or more predictions of a signal metric of one or more cells associated with the third event; one or more measurements of the signal metric of one or more cells associated with the third event; or a prediction of ToS in a cell associated with the third event.
33. The method of any one of claims 1 to 32, wherein the predicted time of the third event comprises at least one of: a predicted start time of the third event; a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; or a predicted time of a third event determined based on at least one of a predicted start time, a predicted end time, or a predicted duration of the third event.
34. The method of claim 33, wherein the predicted duration of the third event comprises at least one of: a predicted start time and a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted duration and a predicted end time of the third event; a predicted duration of the third event; a predicted start time and a predicted end time of the third event; or a predicted duration of a third event determined based on at least one of a predicted start time, a predicted end time, or a predicted duration of the third event.
35. The method of any one of claims 32 to 34, wherein the signal metric comprises at least one of: a reference signal received power (RSRP); a reference signal received quality (RSRQ); or a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of a reference signal.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the reference signal comprises: a synchronization signal block (SSB) reference signal; and/or a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS).
37. The method of any one of claims 8 to 19 or 26 to 36, wherein the handover or handover event comprises: a handover; a conditional handover; a dual connectivity reconfiguration; a multiple connectivity reconfiguration; a cell switch; a cell change; a layer 1 1 layer 2 triggered mobility (LTM); a conditional LTM.
38. The method of any one of claims 1 to 37, comprising receiving, by the wireless device from the base station, one or more first messages comprising the configuration parameters.
39. The method of any one of claims 1 to 38, comprising sending, by the wireless device to the base station, one or more second messages comprising the prediction of the third event.
40. The method of any one of claims 38 to 39, wherein the one or more first messages comprises: an RRC message; an RRC reconfiguration message; an RRC resume message; and/or a prediction configuration message.
41. The method of any one of claims 39 to 40, wherein the one or more second messages comprises: an RRC message; a measurement report message; and/or a prediction report message.
42. An apparatus comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 41.
43. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 41.
PCT/US2025/027076 2024-05-01 2025-04-30 Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device Pending WO2025231120A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202463641190P 2024-05-01 2024-05-01
US63/641,190 2024-05-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025231120A1 true WO2025231120A1 (en) 2025-11-06

Family

ID=95939339

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2025/027076 Pending WO2025231120A1 (en) 2024-05-01 2025-04-30 Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025231120A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230189085A1 (en) * 2021-12-15 2023-06-15 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for cell change prediction in communication system
US20230327790A1 (en) * 2020-07-03 2023-10-12 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Ue and method

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230327790A1 (en) * 2020-07-03 2023-10-12 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Ue and method
US20230189085A1 (en) * 2021-12-15 2023-06-15 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for cell change prediction in communication system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SUDEEP PALAT ET AL: "Areas of interest for RLF/HO failure prediction", vol. RAN WG2, no. Changsha, Hunan Province, CN; 20240415 - 20240419, 5 April 2024 (2024-04-05), XP052584374, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.3gpp.org/ftp/TSG_RAN/WG2_RL2/TSGR2_125bis/Docs/R2-2402405.zip R2-2402405 HO failure RLF prediction.docx> [retrieved on 20240405] *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12336030B2 (en) Random access on multiple active protocol stacks
US20210100059A1 (en) Beam Management and Failure Recovery for Communications
US12376051B2 (en) Cell configuration in inactive state
US20230189280A1 (en) Beam Management in Radio Systems
US20230239748A1 (en) Handover Procedures with Beam Management
US12317149B2 (en) Connection reestablishment procedure
US20230413139A1 (en) Inter Cell Mobility Procedures with Unified Beams
WO2022147228A1 (en) Inter-ue coordination for resource selection
US20250220530A1 (en) Mobility Enhancement
US20240179736A1 (en) Resources for Network Slice
WO2022212820A1 (en) Cell activation and deactivation
WO2022241081A1 (en) Bandwidth part switching for cell
US20240107410A1 (en) Energy Efficiency in Radio Access Network
EP4584992A1 (en) Layer 1 /layer 2 based mobility enhancement
EP4531457A1 (en) Timing advance for mobility
US20240323807A1 (en) Slice Group Information
US20240235790A1 (en) Default Rules in Inter-Cell Multiple Transmission-and-Reception Points
US20240107406A1 (en) Feedback In Radio Access Network
US20230180205A1 (en) Beam Failure Detection and Recovery Procedures in Wireless Networks
US20250351053A1 (en) Wireless Device Predictions
US20250234259A1 (en) Identification of Candidate Cell Configuration
US20240306217A1 (en) Random Access Resource Information Based on Network Slices
WO2025231120A1 (en) Prediction Reporting by a Wireless Device
WO2025235188A1 (en) Radio link failure and handover failure prediction reporting
WO2025233475A1 (en) Wireless device prediction configuration

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25729620

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1